JP6230486B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, in the state where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the winning symbol corresponding to the big or small bonus is displayed for the variable display of the second special symbol. At the same time, the first special symbol variation display is stopped at the off symbol regardless of the result of the first jackpot determination, and the big prize opening opening game corresponding to the result of the second jackpot determination is made. A gaming machine that performs the above is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1). In the second jackpot determination, the probability of winning a small hit is set higher than the probability of a loss.

  As another prior art, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are simultaneously advanced, and the second special symbol having a small variation frequency during the normal game is the first special symbol having a large variation frequency. While the time fluctuates for a longer time than the symbol, the first special symbol with a small variation frequency during a specific game varies for a longer time per variation than the second special symbol with a large variation frequency. A gaming machine is known (for example, Patent Document 2).

  In addition, as another prior art, when one special wins a big hit during the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is displayed as a miss and the second special symbol can be opened and closed after the big win ends. There is also a gaming machine in which the opening time of the starting opening is extended and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that of the first special symbol when the opening is extended (for example, Patent Document 3).

JP 2011-56036 A JP 2008-79743 A JP 2013-226399 A

  The above-mentioned prior art has improved the interest of the game by adopting the simultaneous rotation of special symbols or changing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state. Has an advantage.

However, the above-described prior art does not consider the base of the time reduction state.
Here, “base” indicates the degree of increase / decrease of game balls in the time shortening state. When the game is progressing in the time shortening state and the game ball does not increase / decrease, for example, base 1, A high state (a state larger than 1) is a situation advantageous for the player, and a low base state (a state smaller than 1) is not a favorable situation for the player.
However, according to the game rules, the base of the time reduction state should not exceed 1. For this reason, if the game rules are followed, it is necessary to set the base of the time reduction state to less than 1.

  Then, if the base of the time reduction state is set to a constant value less than 1, for example, if there are two states derived from there, a “high probability time reduction state” and a “low probability time reduction state”, both states The base cannot be changed. In other words, setting the base of the time reduction state to a constant value means that the winning probability and fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory are set to the same content. This means that the base itself does not change even if it is “time shortening state” or “low probability time shortening state”.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of changing the base between the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state even in the same time shortening state.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has a first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game relating to the flow of the game ball, and a game relating to the flow of the game ball. When a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs, a second lottery execution means for executing the second lottery and the first symbol is changed based on the execution of the first lottery. Based on the fact that the first symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the first lottery and the second lottery is executed after being displayed in a variable manner over time. , The second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the second lottery, and the first symbol and the second symbol in parallel. The symbol parallel variation means that can be varied as a result, and the first A plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type and a special winning type are defined in advance for the result of winning or the winning result obtained in the second lottery, and it corresponds to the special winning type in the first lottery A winning type defining means that prescribes a higher probability of corresponding to the special winning type in the second lottery than a probability, and if the winning result is obtained in the first lottery or the second lottery, When the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special winning type and a winning type determining unit that determines which of the plurality of winning types specified by the type specifying unit When the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the special winning type and a special game executing means for executing the special game, the special game is played in a mode different from the special game. Special game execution means to be performed, and a predetermined probability regarding the first lottery and the second lottery after the special game is completed when the special winning type is satisfied and the predetermined first transition condition is satisfied From the low-probability state in which the second lottery opportunity is generated at a predetermined frequency from the low-probability state in which the winning is obtained to the high-probability state in which the winning is obtained with a high probability compared to the low-probability state, The first high probability time shortening state transition means for transitioning to the first high probability time shortening state by shifting to the time shortening state in which the second lottery trigger can be generated at a higher frequency than the non-time shortening state. And, when the special winning type is satisfied and a predetermined second transition condition is satisfied, after the special game is over, the low probability state is shifted to the high probability state and the non-time shortened state A second high probability time shortening state transition means for transitioning to a second high probability time shortening state by transitioning from a state to the time shortening state, and a condition corresponding to the special winning type and a predetermined third transition condition is satisfied A first low probability time shortening state transition means for transitioning to the first low probability time shortening state by transitioning to the low probability state and transitioning to the time shortening state after completion of the special game, When the special winning type is met and the predetermined fourth transition condition is satisfied, the second low probability time is set by shifting to the low probability state and shifting to the time shortening state after the special game ends. The second low probability time shortening state transition means for shifting to the shortened state and the symbol variation time of the first symbol as the symbol variation time in the first high probability time shortening state. The first high probability time shortened state variation time defining means defining longer than the moving time and the symbol variation time in the second high probability time shortened state as the second symbol variation time The second high probability time shortening state variation time defining means that defines a variation time shorter than the first variation time, and the symbol variation time in the first low probability time shortening state as the symbol variation time. The first low probability time shortening state variation time defining means defining longer than the symbol variation time, and the symbol variation time in the second low probability time shortening state as the symbol variation time. A gaming machine comprising second low-probability time shortening state variation time defining means that defines shorter than two symbol variation times.

In the gaming machine of this solution, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) When a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game related to the flow of game balls (when a game ball enters a start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol), the first lottery (first special symbol lottery) is Executed.
(2) When a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity in (1) above occurs during a game relating to the flow of game balls (when a game ball enters the start winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol) The second lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed.

(3) Based on the execution of the first lottery in (1) above, the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is displayed in a manner representing the result of the first lottery. Stopped display. A certain amount of time (variable display time and stop display time) is required until the stop display is performed after the first symbol variation display is started. Once the first symbol variation display is started, The next first lottery is not performed until the stop display is completed.

(4) When the second lottery of (2) is executed, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the second lottery. A certain amount of time (variable display time and stop display time) is required until the stop display is performed after the start of the variable display of the second symbol. Once the variable display of the second symbol is started, The next second lottery is not performed until the stop display is completed.

(5) When the display times of the variable times related to the execution of the first lottery means (first symbol display means) and the second lottery means (second symbol display means) overlap each other, the first symbol and the second symbol Makes it possible to change in parallel (simultaneously). In general, if the first symbol is changing, the second symbol will not start changing until the first symbol changes, but in this solution, even if the first symbol is changing, The second pattern is varied (so-called simultaneous rotation).

(6) Regarding the winning results obtained in the first lottery in (1) or the second lottery in (2) above, there are a plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type (big win) and a special winning type (small win). Is defined in advance. In addition, the probability corresponding to the special win type in the second lottery (2) is defined higher than the probability corresponding to the special win type in the first lottery (1). For this reason, the second lottery of (2) is more likely to fall into the special winning type than the first lottery of (1).
The special winning type and the special winning type include a lottery role (winning type) based on a lottery result that is advantageous to a player that can be won based on the first lottery or the second lottery.
And the special winning type includes a lottery role related to the transition of the gaming state that makes the profit gained less than in the case of the special winning type, and the predetermined transition condition (the internal state can be shifted). Lottery (so-called big hit with a small number of rounds) that can meet the conditions), or lottery that can not meet the predetermined transition conditions (so-called special hits that are not included in the so-called jackpot probability) It is preferable that it is at least one of the other lottery roles)).

(7) If a winning result is obtained in the first lottery in (1) or the second lottery in (2), it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined in (6) is applicable. Is done.

(8) When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special winning type according to (3) or (4) above, a special game is executed. Special games are jackpot games.
(9) When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special winning type according to (3) or (4) above, the special game is executed. The special game is a game with less profit than the special game, for example, a small hit game.

(10) When the special winning type of (6) above is met and the predetermined first transition condition is satisfied (for example, if the gaming machine is equipped with a probability variation area, the first probability variation symbol (16R symbol a, If the game ball passes the probability variation area during the execution of the special game after winning in 9R symbol 2a), if the game machine does not have the probability variation area, the first probability variation symbol) After the end, the first high probability time reduction state is entered.

(11) When the special winning type of (6) above is met and the predetermined second transition condition is satisfied (for example, if the gaming machine is equipped with a probability variation area, the second probability variation symbol (16R symbol b, If the game ball passes the probability variation area during the execution of a special game after winning in 9R symbol 2b), a second probability variation symbol different from the first probability variation symbol is used if the gaming machine does not have the probability variation region. In the case of winning), after the special game is over, the state is shifted to the second high probability time shortening state.
The first high probability time shortened state and the second high probability time shortened state have different symbol variation times.

(12) When the special winning category of (6) above is met and the predetermined third transition condition is satisfied (for example, if the gaming machine is equipped with a probability variation area, the first certain variation symbol or the first short-term symbol) (If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the execution of the special game after winning in 9R symbol 1a, if the game machine does not have the probability variation area, it will be elected with the first short time symbol), After the end of the special game, the first low probability time shortened state is entered.

(13) When the special winning type of (6) above is met and the predetermined fourth transition condition is satisfied (for example, if the gaming machine is equipped with a probability variation area, the second probability variation symbol or the second shortened symbol) If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the execution of the special game by winning in (9R symbol 1b), the second time different from the first time-short symbol if the gaming machine does not have the probability variation area. When winning with a short time symbol), after the end of the special game, the second low probability time shortened state is entered.
The first low probability time shortened state and the second low probability time shortened state have different symbol variation times.

  Here, the “low probability time shortening state” means that the winning probability of the internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is set to a normal probability (for example, 1/399) and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high (for example, 1 / 1.1), set to a length (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and extended opening time (for example, 1) About 5 seconds and opened twice), and so-called electric chew support is performed in a low probability state. The low probability time shortening state includes a first low probability time shortening state and a second low probability time shortening state.

  On the other hand, in the “high probability time shortened state”, the winning probability of the internal lottery is set to a high probability (for example, 1/100) compared to the previous “low probability non-time shortened state”, and the normal symbol lottery The winning probability is set to a high probability (for example, 1 / 1.1), the normal symbol variation time is set to a shortened length (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and the opening time of the normal electric accessory is extended. The extended open time (for example, about 1.5 seconds and opened twice) is a state in which a so-called electric chew support is performed in a high probability state. The high probability time shortening state includes a first high probability time shortening state and a second high probability time shortening state.

(14) The variation time of the first symbol is defined to be longer than the variation time of the second symbol as the variation time of the symbol in the first high probability time shortened state of (10) above. Regarding the variation time, it is only necessary that the variation time of the first symbol is defined to be longer than the variation time of the second symbol on average. For this reason, in the first high probability time shortening state, the frequency of the second symbol is variably displayed is higher than that of the first symbol.

(15) As the symbol variation time in the second high probability time shortening state of (11) above, the variation time of the first symbol is defined to be shorter than the variation time of the second symbol. As for the variation time, the variation time of the first symbol may be defined to be shorter on average than the variation time of the second symbol. For this reason, in the 2nd high probability time shortening state, the frequency of the 1st symbol is variably displayed rather than the 2nd symbol.

(16) As the symbol variation time in the first low probability time shortened state of (12) above, the variation time of the first symbol is defined to be longer than the variation time of the second symbol. Regarding the variation time, it is only necessary that the variation time of the first symbol is defined to be longer than the variation time of the second symbol on average. For this reason, in the first low probability time reduction state, the frequency of the second symbol is variably displayed is higher than that of the first symbol.

(17) As the symbol variation time in the second low probability time shortening state of (13) above, the variation time of the first symbol is defined to be shorter than the variation time of the second symbol. As for the variation time, the variation time of the first symbol may be defined to be shorter on average than the variation time of the second symbol. For this reason, in the second low probability time shortening state, the frequency of the first symbol is variably displayed is higher than that of the second symbol.

As described above, in the present solution, the second symbol is frequently displayed in the first high probability time shortening state and the first low probability time shortening state, and the second high probability time shortening state and the second low probability time shortening state. In the shortened state, the frequency with which the first symbol is variably displayed is high.
In addition, since the present solving means adopts the gameability of changing the first symbol and the second symbol in parallel, for example, even if the variation of the first symbol does not stop, the second symbol fluctuates in the meantime. And stop.

  And in this solution means, since the probability corresponding to the special winning type in the second lottery is defined higher than the probability corresponding to the special winning type in the first lottery, as a result, the second high probability time shortening state And when staying in the first high probability time shortening state and the first low probability time shortening state is more likely to fall into the special win type than when staying in the second low probability time shortening state .

  As a result, the special game is not often executed in the second high probability time shortened state and the second low probability time shortened state, and the special game is frequently executed in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state. Therefore, the base of the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state can be improved by executing the special game. For this reason, even in the same time shortening state, the base can be changed between the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state, and a base divergence can be generated between the two states.

  In addition, in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state, special games are frequently executed, and thereby, it is possible to obtain the advantage of starting, and the conventional high probability time shortened Compared with a state and a low probability time shortening state, a higher probability time shortening state and a low probability time shortening state can be created.

  Furthermore, in the second high probability time shortening state and the second low probability time shortening state, special games are not executed so much, thereby suppressing the base of the high probability time shortening state and the low probability time shortening state. The suppressed base can be added to the first high probability time shortening state and the first low probability time shortening state, and the superiority of the high probability time shortening state and the low probability time shortening state can be further improved.

  Furthermore, generally, there is a feeling that the player's expectation is improved if the state shifts to the high probability time shortening state, and that the player feels sorry when the state shifts to the low probability time shortening state. However, in the present solution, even in the same high probability time shortening state, the first high probability time shortening state is advantageous (in which the number of balls is increased) and the second high probability time is disadvantageous (in which the number of balls is not increased or decreases). Since there is a shortened state, there is still no relief just because it has shifted to the high probability time shortened state. In addition, since there is a first low probability time shortening state that is advantageous even in the same low probability time shortening state and an unfavorable second low probability time shortening state, even if it shifts to the low probability time shortening state, it is completely unfortunate Don't be.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is a gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the winning type defining unit does not define the special winning type for the first lottery.

  According to this solving means, since the special winning type is not defined for the first lottery, the special game is not executed in the first symbol which mainly fluctuates in the low probability time shortening state. For this reason, improvement of the base in the second high probability time shortened state and the second low probability time shortened state due to the execution of the special game can be avoided, and the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time A further base divergence can be generated between the time reduction state and the second high probability time reduction state and the second low probability time reduction state.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is a change when the change in the second symbol corresponds to the special winning type in the solution 1 or 2, and the change in the first symbol is not won. If the variation is applicable, the measurement of the variation time of the first symbol is paused when the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special winning type, and the special game ends. The gaming machine further comprises a variation time measurement pause means for restarting the measurement of the variation time of the first symbol after the first time.

  In this solution, when the second symbol corresponds to the special winning type (small hit), if the first symbol is changing, the measurement of the variation time of the first symbol is paused at that time, and the special game ends. After that, measurement of the variation time of the first symbol is resumed. For this reason, it is possible to continue the non-winning variation of the first symbol even after the special game is finished, and the first symbol is won in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state. Can be avoided as much as possible. In addition, by adopting the function of temporarily stopping the measurement of the fluctuation time, the number of fluctuations of the first symbol can be reduced as much as possible in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state. The advantages of the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state can be maintained.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is the game machine according to any one of solutions 1 to 3, wherein the special game execution unit is configured to release a game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball for a predetermined release time. The gaming machine is characterized in that the special game is executed by executing an opening / closing operation that shifts to an open state in which entering a ball is easy.

  In this solution, the special game shifts from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball to an open state in which it is easy to enter a game ball over a predetermined release time (for example, about 1.8 seconds). Since it is executed by executing the opening / closing operation, in a special game, the player can easily obtain a certain number of balls, and the base in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state Can be improved.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution may be any one of solutions 1 to 4, wherein the first high probability time shortened state, the second high probability time shortened state, the first low probability time shortened state, and the The second low probability time shortening state is a gaming machine characterized in that a common setting content is defined as a setting content regarding the frequency of occurrence of the second lottery opportunity regarding the time shortening state.

  In the present solution, the first high probability time shortening state, the second high probability time shortening state, the first low probability time shortening state, and the second low probability time shortening state relate to the occurrence frequency of the second lottery opportunity related to the time shortening state. Common setting contents are defined as setting contents. Here, examples of the setting contents include setting contents regarding the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, setting contents regarding the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, setting contents regarding the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory, and the like.

  In the present solution, in the first high probability time shortening state, the second high probability time shortening state, the first low probability time shortening state, and the second low probability time shortening state, such setting contents are assumed to be the same. On the other hand, the base of both states is changed by special games. For this reason, compared with the case where different setting contents are defined in each state, it is possible to bring about a deviation of the base in each state while simplifying the control contents.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine of the present solution is a value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out when the game is progressing in the time-reduced state by the number of game balls fired in any of the solution means 1 to 5. And the base is 1 in a state where the game ball does not increase or decrease, the base is greater than 1 in the first high probability time shortened state and the first low probability time shortened state, and the second high In the probability time shortening state and the second low probability time shortening state, the base is smaller than 1, the first high probability time shortening state, the second high probability time shortening state, the first low probability time shortening state, and the The gaming machine is characterized in that the base is smaller than 1 in a state where all the states of the second low probability time shortening state are added.

  According to this solution, since the base is larger than 1 in the first high probability time shortening state and the first low probability time shortening state, the first high probability time shortening state and the first low probability It is possible to increase the number of balls in the time shortening state. On the other hand, since the base is smaller than 1 in the second high probability time shortened state and the second low probability time shortened state, the number of balls that are played will decrease unless it is a big hit.

  And in the state where all the states of the first high probability time shortening state, the second high probability time shortening state, the first low probability time shortening state and the second low probability time shortening state are added, the base is smaller than 1. , The game can be advanced while complying with the game rule that “the base in the time reduction state must not exceed 1”.

  According to the present invention, the base can be changed between the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state even in the same time shortening state.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows the open | release operation | movement pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss | disconnection (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table A (1st low probability time reduction state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table B at the time of loss (2nd low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table A (1st high probability time shortening state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table B at the time of loss | disconnection (2nd high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state / special section). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state / special section). It is a figure which shows the internal lottery correspondence table. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the fluctuation time in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the change time in a 1st high probability time shortening state. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the change time in a 2nd high probability time shortening state. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the change time in a 1st low probability time shortening state. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the change time in a 2nd low probability time shortening state. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during special symbol change. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the change display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit lottery probability and small hit lottery probability of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the opening pattern of the big prize opening according to winning design, and the contents of production. It is a figure explaining the base during 1st probability change and 2nd time reduction. It is a figure explaining the base during 2nd probability change and 1st time reduction. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2" in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round symbols" or "9 round symbols 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a figure explaining the state transferred when it corresponds to various winning symbols in normal mode, fireworks rush, or coast mode. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in a non-time shortening state. It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production effect of the big role when it corresponds to “9 round symbols 1” etc. in normal mode (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production effect of a big role when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in normal mode (4/4). It is a continuation figure showing the example of production of super fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure showing the example of production of normal fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure showing the example of production performed at the time of winning in super fireworks rush. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role effect executed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role effect executed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production of the production performed when it corresponds to a small hit during super fireworks rush (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production of the production performed when it corresponds to a small hit during super fireworks rush (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of operation of the 1st variable prize apparatus and the 2nd variable prize apparatus in normal fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure showing the example of production of super coast mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of normal beach mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production of the production performed when it corresponds to the small hit in the super coast mode (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production of the production performed when it corresponds to the small hit in the super coast mode (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of operation of the 1st variable winning apparatus and the 2nd variable winning apparatus in normal beach mode. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during operation | movement of a variable winning apparatus.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit). It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, or is changing the symbol, displaying the big hit, or playing the big hit game. It is possible to generate a certain effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). The player can change the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) The second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, or the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26 (26a), an upper starting winning opening 26 (26b), a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable start winning apparatus 28, The first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 (26a) is arranged at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the upper starting winning port 26 (26b), the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion of the game area 8a. . Here, the first variable winning device 30 is disposed on the right side of the middle start winning port 26 (26 a), and the second variable winning device 31 is disposed on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 (predetermined winning hole) is arranged below the variable start winning device 28. .

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and further, a ball entrance 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the nail. The ball inlet 19a and the outlet 19b are connected by a communication passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the entrance 19a is decelerated and rectified through this communication passage, and is released from the exit 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined entrance) is arranged on the right side of the start gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but enters the out port 19c when it is flipped to the right by the obstacle nail.

  The game balls thrown into the game area 8a enter the middle start winning port 26 (26a), the upper start winning port 26 (26b), the normal winning ports 22, 24, or the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down. Or a variable start winning device 28 during operation, a first variable winning device 30 during an opening operation, and a second variable winning device 31 during an opening operation. Here, the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a may possibly enter the middle start winning opening 26 (26 a) or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a enters the entrance 19a and is released from the exit 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the upper start winning opening 26 (26b). Whether to enter the ball, enter the variable start winning device 28 during operation, enter the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, or enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation There is a possibility of entering the normal winning opening 24. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26 (26a), the upper starting winning opening 26 (26b), the normal winning openings 22, 24, and the variable start winning apparatus 28. The game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30, the second variable prize-winning device 31, and the out port 19c are played through the through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8). It is recovered to the back side of the panel unit 8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 (26a) or the normal winning opening 22, the area of the left portion in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called “left strike”) in the (left strike area).

On the other hand, in the case where a game ball is entered in the variable start winning device 28, the upper start winning port 26 (26b), the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning port 24, It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called “right-handed”) into the right-side area (right-handed area).
And by such arrangement of the right portion, when a game ball is driven into the right portion of the game area 8a, the game ball enters both the upper start winning opening 26 (26b) and the variable start winning device 28. there is a possibility. For this reason, especially in the time shortening state, when the display times of the variation times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap each other, the first special symbol and the second special symbol vary in parallel (simultaneously). It becomes possible to do.

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined entrance) (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position retracted from the board surface (a retreat position), making it impossible for the game ball to enter the right start winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) that protrudes to the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a. Note that the variable start winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start winning port by displacing the opening / closing member so as to fall forward with the lower edge portion of the opening / closing member as a hinge.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and a predetermined first condition (for example, 6 rounds from the first round) Is activated when the first or the 16th to 16th rounds are satisfied (special electric accessory, first special entry) Event generation means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26 (26a) (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. Is not possible (the first big prize opening 30b is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is drawn into the board surface, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the first big winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode), and a predetermined second condition (for example, , The seventh round to the ninth round) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second Special entry event generation means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Cannot enter the ball (the second large winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning port 31b.

  In addition, a guide passage 31 c for guiding a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is disposed inside the second variable winning device 31. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second major winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends to the lower left, and then extends downward again.

  A second count switch 85 is disposed upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a probability variation region blade member 31d and a probability variation region hole 31e are disposed in the middle flow of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is disposed downstream of the air outlet.

  A game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by the second count switch 85 to enter first. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid for operating the probability variation region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so the game ball passes through the upper portion of the probability variation region blade member 31d, It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (no reference sign) is provided in the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation area is an area in which a game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the probability varying region blade member 31d is activated when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which game balls can pass.

  The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the probability variation region blade member 31d is that the production region is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) simultaneously with the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is extended for a long time. It is a pattern that is opened for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). Note that the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term release that is executed simultaneously with the start of the round, and therefore, the game ball is not guided to the probability variation region by this operation. Even if the probability variation area blade member 31d is operated, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area when the second variable winning device 31 is short-circuited.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration of a ship on which three animals are on board). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k flows into the middle start winning opening 26 (26a) directly below the ball discharge path 40k. It becomes easy to do.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. Also, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26 (26a), the upper starting winning port 26 (26b), the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the out port 19c. All game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the ball, are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (First symbol display means, second symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is provided each time the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 (26a) or the upper start winning opening 26 (26b). In order to memorize that a game ball has entered 26 (26b), it will change to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to a maximum of 4), and the change of special symbols will start with that ball Each time it is done, the display mode is changed to a reduced display mode. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port 28a. Change to the display mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters the (26a) or upper start winning opening 26 (26b), the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board unit 8 corresponds to the middle start winning opening 26 (26a), the upper starting winning opening 26 (26b), the variable start winning apparatus 28, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the second variable winning apparatus 31, respectively. A middle start winning port switch 80, a right start winning port switch 82, an upper start winning port switch 83, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82, 83 is used to enter a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 (26a), the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a), and the upper start winning port 26 (26b). It is for detection. The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

  Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning port switch 86 for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 22 and a second winning port switch for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 24. 81 is equipped. In addition, although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is given as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are arranged. Incoming balls may be detected individually.

  In any case, winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In this embodiment, the game board unit 8 has a gate switch 78, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first winning port switch 86, a second winning port switch 81, and a probability changing area switch 95. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening corresponding to the upstream of the probability changing region, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97, and a probability changing area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( Actuating) or moving the probability variation region blade member 31d. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use prohibition area and a stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, the probability changing area solenoid 99, etc. The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 performs the test signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 as described above. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the terminal or command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability changing area switch 95, the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the upper starting winning port switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count. The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the switch 85, the first winning port switch 86, and the second winning port switch 81 is read.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, a game is being played based on winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, and the upper starting winning opening switch 83. The event that occurred is determined, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, or the upper start winning port switch 83, the main control CPU 72 respectively receives the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined that an event serving as an internal lottery trigger (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, or the upper start winning port switch 83 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205a, Step S205b, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the first special symbol game process, the second special symbol game process, and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the first special symbol game process (step S205a), the main control CPU 72 controls execution of an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, and controls variation display and stop display by the first special symbol display device 34. Or the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. In the second special symbol game process (step S205b), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, and controls the variable display and stop display by the second special symbol display device 35. Or the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204), and in this normal symbol game processing The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, the number of winning balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). A prize ball instruction command to be output.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9).

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 drives each of the drive signals of the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, the second large prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, and the test. Output the port with the signal etc.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery trigger is generated) from the middle starting winning port switch 80 or the upper starting winning port switch 83 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability changing area switch 95 corresponding to the probability changing area provided in the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes the process at the time of passing through the probability changing region. As the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag in the flag region of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means) , Advantageous gaming state transition means). The probability variation function operation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the probability variation function operation flag is reset before the start of the big hit game when the winning result is obtained before the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times). Further, as the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation area passing command. The probability variation area passing command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). The main control CPU 72 may execute the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the solenoid 99 for the probability variation area is operated during the big hit game). On the other hand, if no detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for the first special symbol and four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for the second special symbol. Big hit symbol random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 11), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S46 in FIG. 12) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this process includes the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning port 26 (26a) or the upper start winning port 26 (26b)), the second special symbol (entering the variable start winning unit 28). For each ball). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol of the caller. Return to the storage update process (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random number stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this will be displayed in the “probable variable region passable symbol (9 round symbol 2, 16 round symbol)” If applicable, for example, “A0H” is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and from the result, as the jackpot type, “probability variation region passage difficult symbol (9 round symbol 1)” or “probability variation region passage symbol (9 round symbol 2) , 16 round symbols) ”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value indicates “probable change region passable symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, “01H” is set as the special symbol destination determination value when it corresponds to “probability variation region difficult passage symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probability variation region passage symbol”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12).

[Parallel variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol]
Next, the details of the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process will be described. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the change in the first special symbol and the second special symbol by separately executing the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to display the second special symbol variation display on the display device 35 in parallel (design parallel variation means). For this reason, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process are separately performed for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the control by the main control CPU 72 (one in one interrupt cycle). To run).

[First special symbol game processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game process.
The first special symbol game process has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag is “start of big game (during big hit game)”.

  Step S1000a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state (internal state) corresponding to the second special symbol is “start of big game (during big hit game)”. This confirmation can be performed based on the progress status of the processing performed so far on the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol game management status). This confirmation is performed in the present embodiment because the game related to the first special symbol is not allowed to proceed when the big hit game is related to the other second special symbol.

  At this time, in particular, if the big special game is not being played regarding the second special symbol (the second special symbol game management status is a value that is big hit) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the processing of the next step S1000b.

  In the first special symbol game process, a procedure (step S1000b) for confirming whether or not the variable time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and whether or not the game state is a small hit is made. Have. When the variable time measurement pause flag is ON, it means that the measurement of the variable time is paused, and when the variable time measurement pause flag is OFF, the measurement of the fluctuation time is It means that it is not paused.

  Step S1000b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variation time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and whether or not the gaming state is a small hit. In the present embodiment, this confirmation is made when a small hit game is being performed with respect to the other second special symbol and the first symbol is fluctuating, and the variation time of the first special symbol is temporarily measured. It is because it is going to stop.

  At this time, if the variable time measurement pause flag is not ON, or even if the variable time measurement pause flag is ON, if the gaming state is not in the small hit state (No), the main control CPU 72 performs the next step. The processes after S1000c are executed. Steps S1000c to S6000 are program modules that form the basis of the first special symbol game process. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the first special symbol through the processes of the basic steps S1000c to S6000.

  On the other hand, when the variable time measurement pause flag is ON and the small hit game is being played (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S7000.

  The basic part of the first special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000c), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), and a special symbol stop display process (step S4000). , A sub-routine (program module) group of variable winning device management process (step S5000) for big hit and variable winning device management process for small hit (step S6000) is included. Here, first, a basic flow of the basic part of the first special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000c: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S6000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the first special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (first special symbol game management status). For example, if the first special symbol has not yet started to display the variation (first special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (first special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is processed. If the process during the change is completed (first special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the variation time measurement of the first special symbol is paused (when the variation time measurement suspension flag is ON instead of the small hit game), the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination. Special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) is selected. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the big hit determination (first lottery execution means) and the variation pattern are determined here, and in the case of the big win, the winning type is also determined. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets a count-down counter for the “time reduction state” and the “high probability state” in accordance with the determination of the winning type. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In addition, in this process, a process for determining whether or not to operate the skip function is also performed. In the previous jackpot determination, for example, the first special symbol is changing to the big jackpot, and the second special symbol is not won. If applicable, the skip function is activated for the second special symbol. By the operation of the skip function, a process for forcibly terminating the non-winning variation of the second special symbol is performed. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the drive signal pattern is constant, whereby the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S5000: The big win variable winning device management process is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of 9 round big hits, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game with respect to the first special symbol, the jump destination is set in the big win variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the number of continuous operations set in advance for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted) for the first big winning port solenoid 90 or the second big winning port solenoid 97. The first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to collect a large number of prize balls by concentrating on the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 in a concentrated manner (special game). Execution means). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is nine, this is called “9 round”. Collectively. In the present embodiment, not only the 9 round jackpot but also a plurality of types of 16 round jackpots are provided as the jackpot type. In addition, for the 9 round jackpot and 16 round jackpot, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein.

  When the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big win variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 or the first round for one round is set. 2 Each time the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 31 is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big game) for the first special symbol only for that round.

When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( First low probability time shortening state transition means, second low probability time shortening state transition means, first high probability time shortening state transition means, second high probability time shortening state transition means).
In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, about 10 times higher than normal. In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, the normal symbol operation lottery becomes highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended to increase the number of times of opening. (So-called electronic Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can play a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be earned. In this embodiment, since the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, this process is not executed. However, when the small hit is set for the first special symbol, this process is not performed. Is executed.

  Step S7000: The variation time measurement paused process is a process of maintaining the fluctuation of the first special symbol without stopping it. The main control CPU 72 controls the driving of the first special symbol display device 34 when the small special game is being played with respect to the second special symbol and the first special symbol is changing. As the drive control of the first special symbol display device 34, a process of outputting an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) to each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED is executed. As a result, the state in which the first special symbol is not stopped is maintained. In addition, when measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, measurement of the variation time is resumed after the end of the small hit game. Note that, even if the main control CPU 72 determines that a small hit game is being played with respect to the second special symbol, if the first special symbol is not changing, the main control CPU 72 does not execute the variable time measurement suspension processing.

[Second special symbol game processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game process.
The second special symbol game process has a procedure (step S1900a) for confirming whether or not the other first special symbol is a big hit.

  Step S1900a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol is “in jackpot game”. This confirmation can also be performed based on the value of the first special symbol game management status as described above. Note that this determination excludes the determination as to whether or not the game is “small hit game” because the first special symbol has no small hit.

  At this time, if the jackpot game is not being played regarding the first special symbol (the value of the first special symbol game management status is a jackpot value) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the processing after the next step S1900b. Steps S1900b to S6900 are program modules that form the basis of the second special symbol game process. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the second special symbol through the processes of steps S1900b to S6900 as the basis.

  As explained in the previous first special symbol game process, the execution selection process (step S1900b), the special symbol change pre-process (step S2900), and the special symbol change process ( Step S3900), special symbol stop display processing (step S4900), big-hit variable winning device management process (step S5900), small-hit variable winning device management process (step S6900) subroutine (program module) group is included. Yes. Note that the description of the same content as the first special symbol game process is omitted as appropriate.

  Step S1900b: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2900 to S6900) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the second special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Here again, which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (second special symbol game management status). For example, if the second special symbol has not yet started to change display (second special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (second special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is processed. If the process during the change is completed (second special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

  Step S2900: In the special symbol variation pre-processing in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation for preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the second special symbol (second lottery execution means).

  Step S3900: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the driving of the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the change timer.

  Step S4900: In the special symbol stop display process in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, and thereby the second special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5900: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the special symbol stop display process. Here again, the stop display mode of the second special symbol is determined in a mode for each winning type. When the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big win variable winning device management process, the second variable winning device for one round is set. Each time the opening / closing operation 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big game) for the second special symbol only for that round.

  Then, when the big hit game is ended with respect to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game is ended based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time shortening function operation flag).

  Step S6900: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display process (special game executing means). For example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can play a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be earned.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for example, “16 round big hit a, b”, “9 round big hit 1a, 1b” and “9 round big hit 2a, 2b” are provided as a plurality of winning types. In this embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round jackpot a, b” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbols a, b”, “9 round jackpot 1a, 1b” corresponds to the jackpot of “9 round symbols 1a, 1b”, “9 “Round jackpot 2a, 2b” corresponds to the jackpot of “9 round symbols 2a, 2b”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol and the opening of the probability variation area will be described.

[9 round symbols 1 (9 round symbols 1a, 1b)]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbols 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 1” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). In addition, in the seventh to ninth rounds, the second grand prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once each in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. To do. Therefore, the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game of “9 round symbol 1” are finished without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 1” jackpot game, approximately 5 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. If it falls under “9 round symbols 1”, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player. In addition, in the big hit game of “9 round symbol 1”, the second grand prize opening is opened from the seventh round to the ninth round, but the opening time of the second big prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. Note that the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. The Similarly, the second grand prize winning port of the second variable prize winning device 31 similarly does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. Closed.

[9 round symbols 2 (9 round symbols 2a, 2b)]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial appearance (prize ball). Also, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened for a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Is performed once. Furthermore, in the 8th and 9th rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than in the 7th round. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, approximately 6 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the opening time of the second grand prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round), so that the game ball has a probability variation area. There is a possibility of passing. In the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second grand prize opening opens at the 8th and 9th rounds, but the opening time of the second grand prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round in the case of “9 round symbol 2”, the “probability” is reached after the end of the big hit game. The “variable function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if it falls under “9 round symbol 2”, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[16 round symbols (16 round symbols a, b)]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is 6 rounds. Continue to eyes. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the seventh round, and this is the ninth round. Continue until. Thereafter, the first grand prize winning opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 10th round, and this is the 16th round. Continue until. For this reason, in the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, approximately 16 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. Here, in the 7th to 9th rounds of the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, the opening time of the second big prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round). May pass through the probability variation region.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 between the 7th and 9th rounds in the case of “16 round symbols”, the big hit game After the end of, the “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if the “16 round symbol” is applicable, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “9-round symbol 2” or “16-round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability changing area during the big hit game, the internal state is reached after the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege of shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”. In addition, in the “high probability time reduction state”, an internal lottery is won, the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, and the game ball is played during the big hit game If the probability variation area is passed, the “high probability time shortened state” is continued (restarted) even after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above “9 round symbol 1”, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the internal state shifts to the “low probability time shortened state” after the big hit game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” above, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the internal state will be Transition to “low probability time state”.

  In the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common “1.5 seconds”. The interval time between rounds is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than non-winning for the second special symbol. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) to be executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but a small hit may be set for the first special symbol. However, in that case, in order to increase the chance of small hits in the second special symbol lottery, in the second special symbol lottery than the probability of hitting the small bonus (special winning type) in the first special symbol lottery It is preferable to define a high probability of hitting a small hit. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can play a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be earned. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached).

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. The contents of the special symbol change pre-processing described below can be common to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) and the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15). However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control target is the first special symbol, and when the following procedure is applied to the second special symbol game process, the control target is the second special symbol. To do. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2090: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the variable time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON.

  When determining that the variable time measurement pause flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2092.

  Step S2092: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol reading process. In this process, the information of the stop symbol saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, based on the read stop symbol information, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2094: The main control CPU 72 executes a remaining variation time reading process. In this process, the value of the variation timer saved in the RAM 76 (remaining variation time value) is read. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the read fluctuation timer in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  Step S2096: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol revariation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol re-variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a re-variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This re-variation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2098: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning off the variation time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76. As a result, the situation that the measurement of the variation time is temporarily stopped is cancelled.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

  On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm in step S2090 that the variable time measurement pause flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2100.

  Step S2100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the number of the special symbol operation memory to be controlled (the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number) remains (is greater than 0). To do. This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of the target symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2150.

  Step S2150: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the other special symbol operation memory number is zero. That is, if the object to be controlled is the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol operation memory number is 0. If the object to be controlled is the second special symbol, the first special symbol operation memory is stored. Check if the number is zero. This confirmation can also be performed with reference to the value of the special symbol operation memory number counter. If the other special symbol operation memory number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether there is no winning for a predetermined time in any start winning opening, and generates a demonstration effect command when confirming that there is no winning for a predetermined time. . The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15). When returning, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game process (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the other special symbol working memory number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute the demo setting process, the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol game Return to the process (FIG. 15).

  On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol operation memory number counter to be controlled is larger than 0 (step S2100: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2160.

  Step S2160: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag for the other special symbol. The big hit flag or the small hit flag is a flag that is set when the big hit or the small hit is hit by the internal lottery, and is reset at the end of the big hit game. Therefore, the confirmation in this process is confirmation whether or not the result of the internal lottery regarding the other special symbol is won in the big hit or the small hit. When the other special symbol variation display is not executed, the result of the confirmation is inevitably No because the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set. Further, here, the determination content is “big hit or small hit”, but only “big hit” or “small hit” may be used.

  In this process, when the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2202. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol, that is, when the value is “00H” (No), the main control CPU 72 next performs step S2200. Execute.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out a lottery random number (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the special symbol to be controlled. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is to be controlled) stored in the RAM 76, and the value after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of fluctuation”. As a result, in the display output management process described above, the display mode of the stored number changes (decreases by 1) for the control target of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value (the jackpot determined random number value) is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second Lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the low probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets “01H” in the big hit flag.

Step S2302: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit determination process (internal lottery).
If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of the small hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. If the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets “01H” in the small hit flag. In the present embodiment, the winning probability for the small hit is “1/3”, and the winning hit corresponds to the small hit at a rate of about once every three variations.

  In this embodiment, as a hit range other than non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is preliminarily defined in the program (non-winning non-winning means), but the state-specific jackpot determination table, The big hit determination table may be written in the ROM 74, read out and compared with the random number value to determine the big hit.

  Step S2202: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, since the same process as in the previous step S2200 is performed, the description is omitted. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2404.

  On the other hand, when the small hit determination process ends (step S2302), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2400.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2402, and if the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 Step S2410 is executed.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the small hit flag in the previous small hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol to be controlled (variation pattern determination means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol to be controlled or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag, and the current state is It is confirmed whether the state is “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. For example, in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 4 to 12 seconds).

  In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened. However, when a special variation pattern is selected, the variation time does not change depending on the number of memories. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of the loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery by the first special symbol is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated on the effect, or the “reach effect” is not generated. It is supposed to be controlled. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. In addition, when the result of the internal lottery using the second special symbol is a non-winning result, for example, a control is performed to make a shift without generating a “reach effect” on the effect.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table A (first low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when the first low probability time shortened state is lost (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “21” to “28” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “28” is set to about 10 minutes if the first special symbol is changed, and is set to about 10 seconds if the second special symbol is changed. Note that the variation pattern selection table A (first low probability time reduction state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table B (second low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used in the second low probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (a variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “121” to “128” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “121” to “128” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. The variation time of the variation pattern numbers “121” to “128” is set to about 10 seconds if the variation is the first special symbol, and is set to about 10 minutes if the variation is the second special symbol. Note that the variation pattern selection table B (second low-probability time shortened state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “122” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table C (first high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when the first high probability time shortened state is lost (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “48” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. The variation times of the variation pattern numbers “41” to “48” are set to about 3 minutes if the variation is the first special symbol, and is set to about 2 seconds if the variation is the second special symbol. Note that the variation pattern selection table C (first high probability time shortening state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss (second high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used in the second high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “141” to “148” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “141” to “148” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern numbers “141” to “148” is set to about 2 seconds if the first special symbol is changed, and is set to about 3 minutes if the second special symbol is changed. Note that the variation pattern selection table D (second high probability time shortening state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “142” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortening state / special section).
This selection table is a special section in a high probability time shortening state, and is a table used when a non-winning state is satisfied (fluctuation pattern defining means). The special section can be the last plural fluctuations (for example, the last six fluctuations) immediately before the high probability time shortening state ends.
Further, this selection table can be used as a common table for the first high probability time reduction state and the second high probability time reduction state.

  Here, in order to realize special fluctuation, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is about 4 seconds, for example) is set as the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation in the special section in the high probability time shortening state. This selection table In the table configuration, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 50) is selected.

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 50 is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[Change pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2430: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability non-time shortened state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability non-time shortened state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2438. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability non-time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2432.

  Step S2432: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2434. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2436.

  Step S2434: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol. Confirmation as to which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds can be realized by storing information on the winning symbol in the RAM 76 at the time of the previous winning. Here, the advantageous symbol is a winning symbol that shifts to “super fireworks rush (first high probability time shortened state)” or “super coast mode (first low probability time shortened state)” after the jackpot game ends, "9 round symbol 1a", "9 round symbol 2a", "16 round symbol a" correspond.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2440. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2442.

  Step S2436: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2444. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2446.

  Step S2438: The main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation pattern table N at the time of loss for the low probability non-time shortened state (FIG. 18).

  Step S2440: The main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table A at the time of loss for the first high probability time shortening state (FIG. 19). Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can shift the gaming state to the first high probability time shortening state (first high probability time shortening state transition means), assuming that the predetermined first transition condition is satisfied.

Step S2442: The main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table B at the time of loss for the second high probability time shortening state (FIG. 20). Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can shift the gaming state to the second high probability time shortening state (second high probability time shortening state transition means) assuming that the predetermined second transition condition is satisfied.
In step S2440 and step S2442, when the main control CPU 72 determines that it is a special section, a special symbol is referred with reference to the loss variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state / special section) shown in FIG. It is also possible to determine the fluctuation pattern.

  Step S2444: The main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table C at the time of loss for the first low probability time shortening state (FIG. 21). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can shift the gaming state to the first low probability time shortening state (first low probability time shortening state transition means) assuming that the predetermined third transition condition is satisfied.

Step S2446: The main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table D at the time of loss for the second low probability time shortening state (FIG. 22). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can shift the gaming state to the second low probability time shortening state (second low probability time shortening state transition means), assuming that the predetermined fourth transition condition is satisfied.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 17).

[Refer to Fig. 17: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are roughly three types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types are “9-round symbol 1”, “9-round symbol 2”, and “16-round symbol”. Each of the three types of winning symbols further includes a plurality of winning symbols. “9 round symbol 1” includes “9 round symbol 1a” and “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 2” includes “9 round symbol 2a” and “9 round symbol 2b”, and “16 “Round symbol” includes “16 round symbol a” and “16 round symbol b”.

  Here, in this specification, when “9 round symbol 1” is simply written, it includes “9 round symbol 1a” and “9 round symbol 1b”, and when simply “9 round symbol 2” is written. "9 round symbol 2a" and "9 round symbol 2b" are included, and "16 round symbol a" and "16 round symbol b" are included when simply expressed as "16 round symbol b".

  In addition, the expression “high probability time reduction state” simply includes “first high probability time reduction state (first probability change)” and “second high probability time reduction state (second probability change)”. The simple description of “low probability time shortening state” includes “first low probability time shortening state (first short time)” and “second low probability time short state (second short time)”.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each allocation value “10”, “35”, “5” is set to 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1a”, “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 2a”, “9 round symbol 2b”, “16 round symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. “a” and “16-round symbol b” are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “9 round symbol 1a” or “9 round symbol 1b” is 10/100 (= 10%), and “9 round symbol 2a” or “ The rate at which “9 round symbol 2b” is selected is 35/100 (= 35%), and the rate at which “16 round symbol a” or “16 round symbol b” is selected is 5/100 (= 5). %). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. In addition, the EVENT values “01H” to “06H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “9 round symbol 1a” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, the case of “9 round symbol 1a”, “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 2a”, “9 round symbol 2b”, “16 round symbol a” or “16 round symbol b” The number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2a”, “9 round symbol 2b”, “16 round symbol a” or “16 round symbol b” Is given 170 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “20”, “30” is the case where the denominator is 100 It corresponds to the ratio. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1a”, “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 2a”, “9 round symbol 2b”, “16 round symbol a corresponding to the distribution value are displayed. "," 16 round symbol b ". That is, in the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of “9 round symbol 2a” or “9 round symbol 2b” is 20/100 (= 20%), and “16 round symbol a The ratio at which “16 round symbol b” is selected is 30/100 (= 30%). In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for “9 round symbol 1a” and “9 round symbol 1b” are not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. In addition, the EVENT values “03H” to “06H” in the lower bytes represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round symbol a” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H05H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol. Note that the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at the time of small hit as well as at the time of big hit.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when the “9-round symbol 2a”, “9-round symbol 2b”, “16-round symbol a”, or “16-round symbol b” is met, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2a”, “9 round symbol 2b”, “16 round symbol a” or “16 round symbol b” Is given 170 times.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state” or the “low probability time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a higher frequency compared to the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated). The operation memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the operation memory for the first special symbol. In this case, if the selection ratio of “16 round symbols” is increased for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win the “16 round symbols” than usual, so that it is possible to increase the player's profit accordingly. There is.

[Refer to Fig. 17: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 9 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined, and in the case of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, any one of them is selected. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 9-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table can be used as a common table for the first low probability time shortening state and the second low probability time shortening state. This selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation patterns that are hit without reaching the reach effect. The variation times of the variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” are set to about 10 seconds for both the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. Note that the big hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the fluctuation pattern numbers “81” to “88” may be a fluctuation pattern in which a reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table can be used as a common table for the first high probability time reduction state and the second high probability time reduction state. This selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit without the reach effect. The variation times of the variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” are set to about 10 seconds for both the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. Note that the big hit time variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state) and the variation pattern number may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” may be variation patterns in which a reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortened state / special section).
This selection table is a table used when a big hit is won in a special section with a high probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). As described above, the special section can be the last plural fluctuations (for example, the last six fluctuations) immediately before the high probability time shortening state ends.
Further, this selection table can be used as a common table for the first high probability time reduction state and the second high probability time reduction state.

  Here, the variation pattern at the time of winning in the special section in the high probability time shortening state is set to the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 10 seconds, for example) in order to secure a dramatic measure for a big hit. The selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern 120).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “120” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The fluctuation pattern 120 per non-reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[Refer to Fig. 17: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects any one of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” as the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means, advantageous game state transition means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is only one type of “one-time small hit symbol”. However, other types such as “twice open small hit symbol” and “three open small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 14, Fig. 15: Special symbol change processing]
In the special symbol variation processing (step S3000 or step S3900), the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the variation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter). The value of the timer counter is decremented according to the value. The main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be controlled while referring to the value of the timer counter until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination.

  In addition, in this process, a determination process for determining whether or not to operate the skip function is also performed, and in the big hit determination or the small hit determination of the previous special symbol change pre-processing, one special symbol is in a change of deviation, and When it is determined that the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit or the small hit, the skip function is activated for the one special symbol. By operating the skip function, the change display of one special symbol is forcibly terminated.

[FIGS. 14 and 15: Special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900), the main control CPU 72 uses the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2092, step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 17). Control the stop display. The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

  Here, the execution conditions of the big hit determination process (step S2300) and the small hit determination process (step S2302) will be briefly described.

[Internal lottery table]
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an internal lottery correspondence table.
In the internal lottery correspondence table, the corresponding special symbol is executed based on the status of the other special symbol when the internal lottery big hit lottery (big hit determination processing) or small lottery lottery (small hit determination processing) is executed. It is shown that it is determined whether or not to do.

  When the other special symbol is “change in big hit (during change display when the big hit flag is 01H)”, the big win lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the result in the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to “out of”.

  Similarly, when the other special symbol is “change in small hits (displaying fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)”, in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are Not executed. Therefore, the result in the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to “out of”. In the case of “change in small hits (during change display when the small hit flag is 01H)”, a method of executing the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery may be employed.

  On the other hand, if the other special symbol is “outside variation (change display when big hit flag or small hit flag is 00H)”, in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big hit lottery is first executed, Therefore, if it does not correspond to the big hit, the small hit lottery is executed. Therefore, the result in the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to “big hit”, “small hit”, or “out of place”. It should be noted that the change in deviation includes waiting for change and a stop display.

  In this way, when one special symbol is “fluctuating big hit” or “fluctuating small hit”, the big special lottery or small lottery will not be executed in the other special symbol, Small hit games are not executed. That is, when one special symbol is “fluctuating big hit” or “fluctuating small hit”, the other special symbol is substantially in a lottery state of big hit or small hit.

[Variation time table (normal)]
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of variation times in the normal state.
When the gaming state is a normal state (the internal lottery probability of the special symbol is low and the operation lottery probability of the normal symbol is low), the main control CPU 72 sets the variation time of the special symbol as follows.

  When the result of the internal lottery falls out, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 to 180 seconds, while the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time ends after 10 minutes once the variation display when the second special symbol is lost is started.

  The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 60 to 180 seconds for the fluctuation display when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the big hit. On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes as in the case of the loss when the internal lottery result corresponds to the big hit or the small win. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time of the second special symbol is commonly set to 10 minutes regardless of the result of the internal lottery. In addition, about the case where it corresponds to jackpot as a result of the internal lottery of the 2nd special symbol, you may set to the same time (for example, 3 to 180 seconds) as the 1st special symbol. This is because it is disadvantageous for the player that the fluctuation is made for a very long time even though the jackpot is hit in a low probability state.

[Variation time correspondence table (at the time of the first certain change)]
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of variation times in the first high probability time shortening state.
When the gaming state is the first certain change state (the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol, the internal symbol probability of the special symbol is high, and the normal symbol operation lottery probability is high), the main control CPU 72 Sets the variation time of the special symbol as follows (first high probability time shortened state variation time defining means).

  When the result of the internal lottery falls out, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 3 minutes, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, when the gaming state is the first certain variation state, if the result of the internal lottery in the first special symbol falls out of place, the variation display of the first special symbol is finished in a long time, and the internal in the second special symbol is completed. When the result of the lottery falls out of the range, the variation display of the second special symbol is completed in a short time.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 2 seconds.
Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
Therefore, when the gaming state is the first certain variation state, if the result of the internal lottery in the second special symbol corresponds to the small hit, the display of the variation of the second special symbol is completed in a short time, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol When the result of the internal lottery with two special symbols corresponds to a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed in a common variation time (10 seconds).

[Variation time correspondence table (at the time of second probability change)]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of variation times in the second high probability time shortening state.
Main control when the gaming state is the second probability change state (the previous winning symbol does not correspond to the advantageous symbol, the internal lottery probability of the special symbol is high, and the operation lottery probability of the normal symbol is high) The CPU 72 sets the variation time of the special symbol as follows (second high probability time shortening state variation time defining means).

  When the result of the internal lottery falls out, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 3 minutes. Therefore, when the gaming state is the second probability variation state, if the result of the internal lottery in the first special symbol falls out of the range, the variation display of the first special symbol is completed in a short time, and the internal in the second special symbol is completed. When the result of the lottery falls out, the display of the variation of the second special symbol is completed in a long time.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes.
Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
Therefore, when the gaming state is the second certain variation state, if the result of the internal lottery in the second special symbol corresponds to the small hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is finished in a long time, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol When the result of the internal lottery with two special symbols corresponds to a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed in a common variation time (10 seconds).

[Variation time table (1st time)]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of variation times in the first low probability time shortening state.
When the gaming state is the first short-time state (the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol, the internal lottery probability of the special symbol is low, and the operation lottery probability of the normal symbol is high), the main control CPU 72 Sets the variation time of the special symbol as follows (first low probability time shortened state variation time defining means).

  When the result of the internal lottery falls out, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, when the gaming state is the first short-time state, if the result of the internal lottery in the first special symbol falls out of place, the variation display of the first special symbol will end in a long time, and the internal in the second special symbol will end. When the result of the lottery falls out of the range, the variation display of the second special symbol is completed in a short time.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 2 seconds.
Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
Therefore, when the gaming state is the short time state, if the result of the internal lottery with the second special symbol corresponds to the small hit, the display of the variation of the second special symbol is completed in a short time, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the result of the internal lottery for the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed in a common variation time (10 seconds).

[Variation time correspondence table (second time reduction)]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of variation times in the second low probability time shortening state.
Main control when the gaming state is the second short-time state (the previous winning symbol does not correspond to the advantageous symbol, the internal lottery probability of the special symbol is low, and the operation lottery probability of the normal symbol is high) The CPU 72 sets the variation time of the special symbol as follows (second low probability time shortened state variation time defining means).

  When the result of the internal lottery falls out, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the result of the internal lottery with the first special symbol falls outside, the first special symbol variable display is finished in a short time, and the internal lottery with the second special symbol is completed. If the result falls out of place, the display of the variation of the second special symbol is completed in a long time.

Further, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes.
Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
Therefore, when the gaming state is the second short-time state, if the result of the internal lottery in the second special symbol corresponds to the small hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated in a long time, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol When the result of the internal lottery with two special symbols corresponds to a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is completed in a common variation time (10 seconds).

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. The contents of the special symbol storage area shift process can be made common to the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process. However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol, the control target is the second special symbol. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: First, the main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled. The details of the specific process are as described in the previous special symbol change pre-process.

  Step S2212: Also, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the special symbol to be controlled. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol to be controlled is the second special symbol. If so, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2214: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of operating memories at the start of change” for the special symbol to be controlled from the value of the operating memory counter after the subtraction.

  Step S2216: Also, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the special symbol to be controlled. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) indicating the command type, and the lower byte value (for example, “00H” to “03H” indicating the number of working memories after the decrease )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. That is, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the previous working memory number “4” (command notation is “14H”) is decreased by 1, so that the current working memory number is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol. If the control target is the second special symbol, the preceding value is a value (for example, “BCH”) indicating that it is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2218: The main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This process is for transmitting an effect command for reducing the number of working memories for the special symbol to be controlled set in the previous step S2216 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notifying means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 17).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol changing process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure. The contents of the special symbol changing process described below can be made common in the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) and the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game process, the control target is the second special symbol.

  Step S3100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the variation timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrements the value corresponding to the interrupt cycle).

  Step S3200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the variation timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the variation timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variation display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 14 or step S1900b in FIG. 15) in the next interrupt cycle to perform the special symbol variation display process. Repeatedly.

  On the other hand, if the value of the variation timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variation display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3300.

  Step S3300: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag for the special symbol to be controlled. When the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3400. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15).

  Step S3400: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed. Is this confirmation process necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol (forcibly end the deviation of the other special symbol) when the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the target special symbol ends? It is executed to confirm whether or not. When it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3500, assuming that the skip function needs to be activated for the other special symbol. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), the main control CPU 72 determines that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and that the skip function does not need to be activated. Return to the symbol game process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15).

  Step S3500: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for operating the skip function for the other special symbol. That is, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for ending the variable display related to the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets 0 to the value of the variation timer for the other special symbol.

  Step S3600: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation end processing. In this process, when the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled is terminated, a value (01H) is set to the special symbol stop display flag of the special symbol in the RAM 76. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or S4900) as the next jump destination. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 15).

[Skip function and variable time measurement pause function]
Hereinafter, in the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35, the skip function for forcibly stopping the variable display halfway and the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol display device 34 are temporarily stopped. The function will be specifically described.

FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing changes in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
Among these, (A) in FIG. 39 shows “an example in which the skip function and the variation time measurement temporary stop function are not activated”, and the first special symbol corresponds to the deviation while the second special symbol is displaying the fluctuation at the time of the big hit. 6 is a timing chart showing changes in each variation display when the skip function and the variation time measurement pause function are not activated when the variation display is started.

  FIG. 39B shows an example of “variation time measurement temporary stop function operation”. While the second special symbol is displayed when the second special symbol is changing, the first special symbol is displayed corresponding to the deviation. 6 is a timing chart showing changes in each variation display when the variation time measurement pause function is activated when the operation is started.

  Further, (C) in FIG. 39 shows an example of “skip function operation”, in the case where the first special symbol starts the variable display corresponding to the big hit while the second special symbol is displayed in the variable display. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing changes in each variable display at each time when the skip function is activated. The skip function and the variation time measurement pause function will be described by taking the timing charts (A) to (C) as examples.

[(A) in FIG. 39: Examples of non-operation of each function]
The state of each special symbol at the time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in a variation waiting state, and the second special symbol is in a variable display during a big hit.

  Then, at time t1, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed in response to the game ball winning at the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. The display device 34 starts the variable display. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed during the big hit, the big lottery and the small hit lottery are not performed in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol. Accordingly, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a loss. In the example shown in the drawing, the result of the internal lottery relating to the first special symbol is selected as a result (non-winning), the fluctuation time relating to the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the fluctuation display ends at time t2. Has been done. Specifically, the time from time t1 to time t2 is set in the variation timer related to the first special symbol. The variation timer represents a time during which the variation display can be performed. The variation timer is subtracted from the variation timer by the time when the variation display is performed, and the variation display ends when the variation timer becomes zero.

  Next, at time t2, since the variation timer related to the first special symbol has become 0, the variation display regarding the first special symbol is terminated, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss. In addition, since the result of the internal lottery regarding the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed is non-winning, a skip function does not operate | move with respect to a 2nd special symbol here. Therefore, the variable display regarding the second special symbol is continued. That is, the variation timer for the second special symbol (at the time of big hit) is not replaced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a game ball wins a start winning opening related to the other special symbol during the fluctuation display of one special symbol at the time of big hit (or even small hit), the other special symbol Of the internal lottery related to symbols, the big hit lottery is not executed. In other words, when one of the special symbols is being displayed during the big hit, the other special symbol is in a no lottery state.

[(B) in FIG. 39: Fluctuation time measurement pause function operation example]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in a waiting state for change, and the second special symbol is in a variable display at the time of a small hit.

  Then, at time t1, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed in response to the game ball winning at the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. The display device 34 starts the variable display. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in the fluctuation at the time of the small hit, the big lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol. Accordingly, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a loss. In the example shown in the figure, the disparity is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, the variation time regarding the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. Yes. Specifically, the time from time t1 to time t2 is set in the variation timer related to the first special symbol. The variation timer represents a time during which the variation display can be performed. The variation timer is subtracted from the variation timer by the time when the variation display is performed, and the variation display ends when the variation timer becomes zero.

  However, here, it is assumed that at the time tx, which is the time between the times t1 and t2, the fluctuation at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is completed. If it does so, the small hit game regarding a 2nd special symbol will be performed after the time tx. Here, it is assumed that a small hit game is executed from time tx to time t2. Then, the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is paused. And the measurement of the remaining fluctuation time is restarted when the small hit game is ended at time t2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the starting winning opening relating to the other special symbol during the change display at the time of the small hit in one special symbol, of the internal lottery relating to the other special symbol The big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed. Then, when the small hit game with one special symbol is started, the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is resumed after the small hit game is finished. The

[(C) in FIG. 39: Example of skip function operation]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in a variation waiting state and the second special symbol is in a variable display at the time of detachment.

  Then, at time t1, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed in response to the game ball winning at the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. The display device 34 starts the variable display. Here, since the variation display at the time of the second special symbol being lost is being performed, the big win lottery is first executed in the internal lottery relating to the first special symbol, and the small hit lottery is performed when it does not correspond to the big win. That is, the first special symbol indicates that the big hit lottery can be executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, a small hit or a loss. In the illustrated example, the jackpot is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, the variation time regarding the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. Yes. Specifically, the time from time t1 to time t2 is set in the variation timer related to the first special symbol. The variation timer represents a time during which the variation display can be performed. The variation timer is subtracted from the variation timer by the time when the variation display is performed, and the variation display ends when the variation timer becomes zero.

  Next, at time t2, since the variation timer related to the first special symbol becomes 0, the variation display regarding the first special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit. Since the result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol that has been stopped is a big hit, and the variation display regarding the second special symbol is being executed, the skip function is activated. Then, by the operation of the skip function, the fluctuation display at the time of detachment related to the second special symbol is terminated (forced termination means). Specifically, the variation timer for the second special symbol is replaced with 0. Therefore, the set fluctuation time is skipped.

  Unlike the operation example shown in FIG. 39 (B), the fluctuation display at the time of the loss regarding the skipped second special symbol is not executed again. In addition, the variable display effect by the effect symbol at the time of the detachment with respect to the second special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 42 is similarly skipped, and is ended at the same time as the time t2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a start winning opening relating to the other special symbol while one of the special symbols is displayed during fluctuation display, a big hit lottery is executed in the internal lottery relating to the other special symbol. Is done. That is, when one of the special symbols is not being displayed in the fluctuation display at the time of big hit or small hit, it represents that the big special lottery or the small hit lottery is possible for the other special symbol. For example, as described above, when the game ball is won at the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol when the second special symbol is being displayed in the variation state or when the second special symbol is waiting for variation, Of the internal lottery related to special symbols, the big hit lottery is executed first, and then the small hit lottery is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation display at the time of big hit for the other special symbol (first special symbol) is started during the fluctuation display at the time of losing one special symbol (second special symbol), The variation display of the special symbol (second special symbol) is skipped, and the variation display can be forcibly terminated.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit lottery probability and a small hit lottery probability of a gaming machine.
For example, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is a normal state (special symbol is in a low probability state) is set to 1/399. The original jackpot probability when the gaming state is a probable change state (a special symbol is a high probability state) is set to 1/100. The small hit probability is defined according to the type of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state, and since the first special symbol has no small hit, there is no small hit probability. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to one third. For this reason, in the second special symbol lottery, the setting is likely to correspond to a small hit (winning type defining means).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 in FIG. 14 or step S4900 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure. The contents of the special symbol stop display processing described below can also be made common in the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process. That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game process, the control target is the second special symbol.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 14 or step S1900b in FIG. 15) in the next interrupt cycle to perform the special symbol stop display processing. Repeatedly.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set.

  Step S4603: When it is confirmed that the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4300: Yes), the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed. To do. This confirmation process is performed in order to confirm whether or not it is necessary to activate the variation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol as the variation display at the time of the small hit of the target special symbol ends. Executed.

  If it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next determines that it is necessary to activate the variable time measurement pause function for the other special symbol, step S4604a. And step S4604b is performed. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the main control CPU 72 assumes that it is not necessary to activate the variable time measurement pause function. Next, step S4605 is executed.

  Step S4604a: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for operating the variation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol, that is, processing for saving variation information of the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stores the current variation timer value (remaining variation time value) and stop symbol information in the RAM 76 in order to temporarily stop the variation time measurement of the first special symbol. Execute the save process.

  Step S4604b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for turning on the variable time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 (fluctuation time measurement pause means). Thereby, it will be in the situation where measurement of fluctuation time is being suspended.

  Step S4605: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hits as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start a small hit (during a small hit game)” as an internal state flag for control for the special symbol to be controlled. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit game is being played for the special symbol to be controlled. The state command indicating that a small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

  Step S4600: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table for “special symbol to be controlled” to “big winning variable variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, a value representing “9 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is being hit for the special symbol to be controlled. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 17). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “9 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.
If the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4610: When the processing of step S4602 or step S4606 is completed, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In the present embodiment, since the so-called frequency cut probability changing function is adopted, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”, the frequency cut counter relating to the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), The turn-off counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times). In addition, in the case of shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the number cut counter relating to the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”, the count-off counter regarding the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), These are a probability variation function operation flag and a time reduction function operation flag. In addition, when shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the count-down counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so only the time shortening function operation flag is reset is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process (FIG. 14 or FIG. 15).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “9 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “9 rounds (9R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. The number of wins) and the operation pattern of the probability changing area solenoid 99 are selected. The winning pattern opening pattern for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probability changing area solenoid 99, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during the opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). But not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 17). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to nine. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“8” for 9 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the big hit opening timer and the probability change area timer (the probability change area release time) based on the big winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability change area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer). The timer value set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or the opening time of the probability changing area. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is set to enter the big prize opening or the probability change during one release. This is a sufficient time (for example, a time when 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more) when the region passes easily. On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is not incapable of entering the big prize opening or passing through the probability change area during one release. In both cases, it is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launch control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the big hit interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (probability variation region temporarily based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set the timer to count the waiting time for closing. The timer value set here is a waiting time between rounds of big hit or a temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big win time big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management processing (FIG. 43).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big prize winning interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big prize opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the big prize opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big prize winning interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the big prize opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big prize opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 44) is executed.

  Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the probability variation area interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

  Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes probability variation area release processing. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device with a big hit shown in FIG. 16, a drive signal to be applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 44) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5307a. Execute.

  Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area release time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability change area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5308. Run.

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

  Step S5307b: Probability change area closing processing is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5312. Run.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 shifts from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability changing area interval timer set in the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 44).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the big prize opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the big prize opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 43) for the big hit. Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big prize winning interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 31 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In this embodiment, for example, such an open pattern is adopted in the sixth round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”, but from the first round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”. Up to the fifth round, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Accordingly, since the counter value reaches the number of times set by one opening / closing operation (Yes) in the first to fifth rounds in the case of “16 round symbol 1”, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322. It will be.

  On the other hand, the sixth round in the case of “16 round symbol 1” adopts a pattern in which the opening / closing operation is repeated a plurality of times within one round, so the counter value is still set to the number of times set at the end of one opening. It will not be reached (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the big hit. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 43), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (9 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 43).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event process (step S28 in FIG. 10).

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 170 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state, and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 17) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which number of shortening times is set depends on the value of the probability variation function activation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and sets the probability variation function activation flag. If the value is not set, 100 is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time reduction in progress”. Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 48). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 49) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 48). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 49).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 48). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 49). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 48).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the small winning game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 48). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 48). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module, and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 48).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases “in the small hit game” from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

  FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing changes in the winning pattern opening pattern and effect contents over time for each winning symbol. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 1]
53 (A): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened and closed five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  FIG. 53 (B): From the seventh round to the ninth round, the second large prize opening solenoid 97 is repeatedly turned on and off three times in a short period of time, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes three times. Repeat once. From the 7th round to the 9th round, a short is opened (0.1 second is opened).

  In FIG. 53 (C): As the contents of the effect, the battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round, and the defeat effect is continued in the seventh to ninth rounds. .

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
53 (D): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened and closed five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  In FIG. 53 (E): In the seventh round, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is turned on and off once, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes once. The seventh round is long open (29 seconds open). In the 8th and 9th rounds, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are repeated twice in a short period, and the second variable prize winning device 31 repeats opening and closing twice. The eighth and ninth rounds are short open (0.1 second open).

  In FIG. 53 (F): As for the contents of the effect, a battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round, and a V prize-related effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. Is done. In the V prize-related effect, when the game ball passes the probability variation area, an effect is transmitted to the player that the V prize has occurred, and when the game ball does not pass the probability variation area, the V An effect of transmitting to the player that no winning has occurred is executed.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
In FIG. 53 (G): From the first round to the sixth round, the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is alternately turned on and off six times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 opens and closes six times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 6th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. Further, from the 10th round to the 16th round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated seven times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 repeats opening and closing seven times. The 10th to 16th rounds are long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 53 (H): From the seventh round to the ninth round, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are alternately repeated three times, and the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened and closed three times. repeat. From the 7th round to the 9th round, long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 53, (I): As the contents of the effect, the big role effect dedicated to the 16th round jackpot is executed from the first round to the 16th round. For the seventh to ninth rounds during the big role production, the above V prize-related production can be executed.

  Although the operation timing of the probability variation region solenoid 99 is not particularly illustrated, it operates when the second variable winning device 31 operates.

FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating the base during the first certain change and during the second time reduction.
Here, (A) in FIG. 54 shows a numerical value including a ball out due to a small hit game, and (B) in FIG. 54 shows a numerical value not including a ball out due to a small hit game. In any case, the estimated stay time is 23 minutes for the first certain change (first high probability time shortened state), and 19 minutes for the second short time (second low probability time shortened state). The total game time is 42 minutes. Since the assumed stay time varies depending on the game specifications, the numerical values shown in this table are merely examples.

Further, the base is a value obtained by dividing the number of game balls to be paid out while the game is progressing in a time-saving state by the number of game balls being fired.
If the base is “1”, it indicates that the number of fires and the number of payouts are the same, and the holding ball does not increase or decrease.
If the base is larger than “1”, it indicates that the number of payouts is larger than the number of shots, and the holding ball increases.
If the base is smaller than “1”, it indicates that the number of shots is larger than the number of payouts, and the number of possessed balls decreases.

[Numerical values including ballistics from small hit games]
For example, it is assumed that 2299 game balls are fired during the first probability change. In this case, the number of payouts is 3225, and the base is “1.403”.
In addition, it is assumed that 1893 game balls are fired during the second time. In this case, the number of payouts is 948, and the base is “0.501”.
And the numerical value of the sum of the first probability change and the second short time is “4192” for the number of fires, “4173” for the number of payouts, and “0.995” for the base.
For this reason, when the numerical value based on the small hit game is included, the holding ball increases during the first certain change, and the holding ball decreases during the second time reduction.
However, while the base is greater than 1 during the first certain change, the base is less than 1 during the second time reduction, and the total of both states is less than 1.

[Numerical values that do not include balls from small hit games]
For example, it is assumed that 2299 game balls are fired during the first probability change. In this case, the number of payouts is 1151 and the base is “0.501”.
In addition, it is assumed that 1893 game balls are fired during the second time. In this case, the number of payouts is 948, and the base is “0.501”.
And the numerical value of the sum of the first probability change and the second short time is “4192” for the number of shots, “2099” for the number of payouts, and “0.501” for the base.
For this reason, when the numerical value due to the small hit game is not included, the holding ball decreases during both the first certainty change and the second short time.
In the present embodiment, during the first probability change and during the second time reduction, common setting contents (setting contents regarding the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, as setting contents regarding the occurrence frequency of the second special symbol lottery opportunity regarding the time shortening state, The setting contents related to the normal symbol fluctuation time and the setting contents related to the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory are specified. Therefore, the base is the same during the first positive change and the second short time except for the ball-out by the small hit game. It becomes.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating the base during the second probability change and during the first time reduction.
Here, (A) in FIG. 55 shows a numerical value including a ball out due to a small hit game, and (B) in FIG. 55 shows a numerical value not including a ball out due to a small hit game. In any case, the estimated stay time is 23 minutes during the second probability change (second high probability time shortened state), and 19 minutes during the first short time (first low probability time shortened state). The total game time is 42 minutes. Since the assumed stay time varies depending on the game specifications, the numerical values shown in this table are merely examples.

[Numerical values including ballistics from small hit games]
For example, it is assumed that 2299 game balls are fired during the second probability change. In this case, the number of payouts is 1151 and the base is “0.501”.
In addition, it is assumed that 1893 game balls are fired during the first hour. In this case, the number of payouts is 2656, and the base is “1.403”.
The sum of the second probability change and the first short time is “4192” for the number of shots, “3807” for the number of payouts, and “0.908” for the base.
For this reason, when the numerical value based on the small hit game is included, the number of held balls decreases during the second certain change, and the number of held balls increases during the first time reduction.
However, although the base exceeds 1 during the first time reduction, the base is less than 1 during the second probability change, and the base obtained by adding both states is less than 1.

[Numerical values that do not include balls from small hit games]
For example, it is assumed that 2299 game balls are fired during the second probability change. In this case, the number of payouts is 1151 and the base is “0.501”.
In addition, it is assumed that 1893 game balls are fired during the first hour. In this case, the number of payouts is 948, and the base is “0.501”.
The sum of the second probability change and the first short time is “4192” for the number of shots, “2099” for the number of payouts, and “0.501” for the base.
For this reason, when the numerical value based on the small hit game is not included, the holding ball decreases during both the second probability change and the first time reduction.
In the present embodiment, during the second probability change and during the first time reduction, the common setting contents (setting contents regarding the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, as the setting contents regarding the occurrence frequency of the second special symbol lottery opportunity regarding the time shortening state, The setting contents related to the normal symbol variation time and the setting contents related to the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory are specified, so the base is the same during the second probability change and the first short time except for the ball-out by the small hit game. It becomes.

  Thus, while the base is greater than 1 during the first probability change, the base is less than 1 during the second time reduction, and the total of both states is less than 1. In addition, while the base is over 1 during the first time reduction, the base is less than 1 during the second likelihood change, and the base summing up both states is less than 1. Therefore, the base is smaller than 1 in the state in which all the states during the first probability variation, the second probability variation, the first time reduction, and the second time reduction are added up.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining a game flow that is developed when the game corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. As described above, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time reduced state”, the first special symbol starts to change when the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 (26a). As the game progresses.

  [F1] In the normal mode, [F2] When winning the big hit of “9 round symbol 1 (9 round symbol 1a or 9 round symbol 1b)”, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, [ [F4] Defeated in the battle of the big role, [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when [F7] “9 round symbol 2 (9 round symbol 2a or 9 round symbol 2b)” is won, [F3] 9 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, [ F8] Win a battle with a big role.

  [F9] When the game ball passes the probability variation area in the seventh round of the 9th round jackpot game (when winning V), [F10] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

  [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state. [F11] If the result of winning is not obtained in the fireworks rush and [F12] special symbols fluctuate 170 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, if [F13] corresponds to the 9th round symbol 2, but the game ball does not pass the probability variation area in the seventh round of the big hit game (if V is not won), [F10] V win does not occur The effect which shows this is performed, and it transfers to [F5] coast mode.

  [F5] If the 16-round symbol (16-round symbol a or 16-round symbol b) is hit in the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, a 16-round jackpot game is executed. If the game ball passes the probability change area in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game, the game moves to [F11] fireworks rush, and the game balls in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game. Does not pass through the probability variation area, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed when the fireworks rush or the coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols” or “9 round symbols 2”.
[F5] Coast mode or [F11] Fireworks rush [G1] If you win the big hit of “16 round symbol (16 round symbol a or 16 round symbol b)”, [G2] 16 round big hit game (special bonus) Executed.

  [G3] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in any of the seventh round to the ninth round of the 16 round big hit game (when winning V), [G4] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred. Is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, [F11] fireworks rush is entered.

  On the other hand, although [G5] corresponds to the 16-round symbol, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in any of the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), [G6 ] An effect indicating that no V winning has occurred is executed, and after the big hit game ends, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

  [F5] Coast mode or [F11] Fireworks rush [G10] When winning the big hit of “9 round symbol 2 (9 round symbol 2a or 9 round symbol 2b)” [G11] 9 round big hit game (normal bonus effect) ) Is executed.

  [G12] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the seventh round of the ninth round jackpot game (when winning V), [G13] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, [F11] Fireworks Rush is entered.

  On the other hand, although [G14] corresponds to the 9th round symbol 2 but the game ball does not pass the probability variation area in the seventh round of the big hit game (when V is not won), [G15] for example, the end of the ninth round After that, an effect indicating that no V winning has occurred is executed, and then, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining a state that is shifted in the case of corresponding to various winning symbols in the normal mode, the fireworks rush, or the coast mode.

  [F21] In normal mode, fireworks rush or coast mode, when [F22] “9 round symbol 1a” hits a big hit, after the big hit game ends, [F23] shifts to the super coast mode.

  [F21] In normal mode, fireworks rush or coast mode, when [F24] “9 round symbol 1b” hits a big hit, after the big hit game ends, [F25] shift to the normal coast mode.

  [F21] In normal mode, fireworks rush or coast mode, [F26] If it hits a big hit of “9 round symbol 2a” or “16 round symbol a”, after the big hit game ends, [F27] transition to super fireworks rush To do. If the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2a” or “16 round symbol a”, it shifts to [F23] Super Coast mode.

[F21] In normal mode, fireworks rush or coast mode, [F28] If a big hit of “9 round symbol 2b” or “16 round symbol b” is met, [F29] transition to normal fireworks rush after the big hit game ends To do. If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2b” or “16 round symbol b”, it shifts to [F25] normal coast mode.
The above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 59 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
59 (A): For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 59, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is “9 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
59 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.
Here, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in parallel, but in the “normal mode”, the second special symbol hardly fluctuates, and therefore corresponds to the second special symbol. The effect symbol to be displayed is not displayed, and only the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. However, an effect symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the “normal mode”.

[Left design stop]
(C) in FIG. 59: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “8” is stopped at the left position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 59, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed in conjunction with that decreases. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 59, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 59 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 59: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 60 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” in the non-time shortened state. It is. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” ( For example, it is executed until the 7 segment LED is stopped and displayed at “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) (reach) Production execution means). In addition, in FIG. 60, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 60 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
60 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 60: After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change in the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 60 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 60 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 60 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expectation level of the big hit in “9 round symbol 2” will be high, so not only the success or failure of the lottery, but also “ Players can have a variety of tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 60, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 60 (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 60 (H): When the reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it was split into a close-up and the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased, and if the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end, it is a big hit” ”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “the jackpot may be close soon” can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 60 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to either “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”. However, for example, “5” ”Is displayed in the center of the screen so that the player is informed that the game has fallen into“ 9 round symbol 1 ”or“ 9 round symbol 2 ”this time. .

  In FIG. 60 (J): For example, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. In other words, by making an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is not disclosed to the player that “I won in 9 round symbol 1 or 9 round symbol 2” I can leave.

  In addition, when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 2", the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “9 round symbol 2” corresponds internally, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and an effect symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed by re-variation (for example, a re-lottery effect). It is possible to execute an effect that clearly teaches that it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of production during a major role in the case of “9 round symbols 1”, etc.]
FIGS. 61 to 64 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect of the big role production in the case of corresponding to “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” in the normal mode.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the big role effect, and when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”, the friend An effect in which the character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
In FIG. 61, (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 61 (B): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 61, (C): When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 61 (D): In the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella delivers a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 1", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 2" Yes.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 1 symbol)]
In FIG. 62 (E): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).
In addition, in the sixth round in the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set extremely short, almost no profit is gained by playing. .

[7th round (when 9 symbols are selected for 9th round)]
In FIG. 62 (F): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the jackpot game, a re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed. In addition, from the 7th to the 9th round when winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. Further, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 62 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 1 ends (during the end process), the major end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends. In addition, after this, it will shift to “normal coast mode” or “super coast mode” included in the coast mode, but you may display which mode to transition to at this point (hereinafter the same) ).

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 63 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in the 9-round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).
In addition, in the sixth round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set to be extremely short, there is almost no profit due to the game. .

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 63, (I): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). Profits from launching can be obtained. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  In FIG. 63 (J): When the player continues to make a right strike, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 63 (K): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends. In addition, after this, it will shift to “Normal Fireworks Rush” or “Super Fireworks Rush” included in the fireworks rush, but you may display which mode to shift to at this point (hereinafter the same) ).

  The above is an example of an effect when the game ball passes the probability variation area safely corresponding to “9 round symbol 2”, but the game ball passes the probability variation region even if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If it does not, it will be the following production example.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 64 (L): In the case of winning in the 9-round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 64, (M): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). Profits from launching can be obtained. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the seventh round for some reason (not hitting right, clogged with a ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[8th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 64, (N): In this case, a failure effect is produced in which the panda character utters the line “sorry”. Note that the same failure effect as in the eighth round is executed in the ninth round of the jackpot game. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short. Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 64, (O): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 2 ends (during the end process), the big end ending effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of Super Fireworks Rush Production]
FIG. 65 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of super fireworks rush. The super fireworks rush corresponds to a big hit of “9 round symbol 2a” or “16 round symbol a”, and is a mode that is shifted after the big hit game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game.
The super fireworks rush is a first high probability time reduction state, and is a chance zone that continues until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 170 times after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 65, (A): corresponds to, for example, “16 round symbol a”, and when the game ball passes the probability variation area during the big hit game, the game moves to the super fireworks rush. In the illustrated example, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed in a “super fireworks rush” state.

Here, in this embodiment, since the control which fluctuates a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol in parallel is employ | adopted, the 1st production symbol corresponding to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol are used. Corresponding second effect symbols are also variably displayed in parallel. The first effect symbol and the second effect symbol have left, middle, and right effect symbols, respectively, and the first effect symbol is variably displayed in the reduced state at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A second effect symbol larger than the first effect symbol is variably displayed.
The reason why the first effect symbol is displayed smaller and the second effect symbol is displayed larger is that the fireworks rush frequently changes in the second special symbol instead of the first special symbol.

  In order to deeply impress that the background image of Super Fireworks Rush is a fireworks rush that is advantageous to the player, "Scenery where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "Woman character watching fireworks" are displayed It is a background image. Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are variably displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  FIG. 65 (B): The second effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed because the change of the second special symbol (during non-winning) has ended (“3”-“1”- “7”). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the first special symbol is not finished, and the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 at the upper left of the screen are also variably displayed.

  FIG. 65 (C): When the next variation of the second special symbol is started, the second special symbol variation display is performed for the second time after the end of the big hit game. Note that in the super fireworks rush (first high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, so as long as the player continues to make a right handing, the variation display of the second special symbol is accompanied. In many cases, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in the present embodiment, since the upper start winning opening 26 (26b) is arranged in the right-handed region, the first special symbol and the first effect symbol also vary. However, since the variation time when the first special symbol is lost is set to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is mainly variably displayed in the fireworks rush.

[Example of normal fireworks rush production]
FIG. 66 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of normal fireworks rush. The normal fireworks rush is a mode that corresponds to a big hit of “9 round symbol 2b” or “16 round symbol b”, and is shifted after the big hit game when the game ball passes the probability variation area during the big hit game.
The normal fireworks rush is a second high probability time shortening state, and is a chance zone that continues until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 170 after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 66 (A): For example, it corresponds to “16 round symbol b”, and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, it shifts to the normal fireworks rush. In the illustrated example, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed in a “normal fireworks rush” state.

Here, in this embodiment, since the control which fluctuates a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol in parallel is employ | adopted, the 1st production symbol corresponding to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol are used. Corresponding second effect symbols are also variably displayed in parallel. The first effect symbol and the second effect symbol have left, middle, and right effect symbols, respectively, and the second effect symbol is variably displayed in a reduced state at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A first effect symbol larger than the second effect symbol is variably displayed.
The reason why the second effect symbol is displayed smaller and the first effect symbol is displayed larger is that the normal fireworks rush frequently changes in the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol.

  The background image of the normal fireworks rush is a background image in which “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky” is expressed in order to impress that the fireworks rush is not so advantageous to the player. For this reason, “female character” is not displayed as in the background image of the super fireworks rush. Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are variably displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 66 (B): The first effect symbol in the center of the screen is stopped and displayed because the change of the first special symbol this time (at the time of non-winning) has ended ("2"-"5"- “1”). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the second special symbol is not completed, and the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the upper left of the screen are also displayed in a variable manner.

  66 (C): When the next variation of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol variation display is performed for the second time after the end of the big hit game. In the normal fireworks rush (second high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, so as long as the player continues to make a right turn, the variation display of the second special symbol is accompanied. Variation display of the second effect symbol is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, since the upper start winning opening 26 (26b) is arranged in the right-handed region, the first special symbol and the first effect symbol also vary. However, since the variation time when the first special symbol is lost is set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner in the fireworks rush.

FIG. 67 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effects executed when winning in the super fireworks rush.
The following production examples are production examples that are executed when the Super Fireworks Rush corresponds to a big hit of “16 round symbols” or “9 round symbols 2”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order. A similar production example is also obtained when winning in the normal fireworks rush.

  In FIG. 67, (A): The variable display effect is performed in the “super fireworks rush” state. In addition, the first effect symbol is displayed with a small variation at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol is displayed with a large variation at the center of the screen. Further, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are displayed. Are displayed fluctuating in parallel.

[When winning]
In FIG. 67 (B): In the case of a change at the time of winning, an effect that the movable body 40f falls after a while from the start of the change is executed. Here, it is assumed that the second special symbol is won.

  In FIG. 67 (C): For example, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2a” or “9 round symbol 2b”, the second effect symbol at the time of winning is substantially synchronized with the stop display of the second special symbol. A stop display effect is executed ("2"-"2"-"2"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the 9 round big hit.

In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol is a variation at the time of winning, the skip function is activated, so that the first special symbol is also stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In the case of no-winning, a stop display effect is executed ("1"-"2"-"3"). In addition, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.
After this, a big hit effect (normal bonus effect) corresponding to the ninth round big hit is executed.

  In FIG. 67 (D): On the other hand, when it corresponds to “16 round symbol a” or “16 round symbol b”, the second effect symbol is selected in synchronism with the stop display of the second special symbol. A stop display effect is executed ("7"-"7"-"7"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to 16 rounds big hit.

In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol is a variation at the time of winning, the skip function is activated, so that the first special symbol is also stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. In the case of no-winning, a stop display effect is executed ("1"-"2"-"3"). In addition, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.
After this, a big hit effect (special bonus effect) corresponding to the 16 round big hit is executed.

[Director-in-chief production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 68 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bodied effect executed during a big hit game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “9 round symbols 2”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 68 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the big-game effect of the content corresponding to the progress of the game, “Big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, at the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, two effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the two effect symbols”. In addition, characters “normal bonus” are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[7 rounds]
68 (B): In the case of winning in “9 round symbol 2”, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge production is successful, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state of high probability reduction. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Aim for V Attacker”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the seventh round when winning with “9 round symbol 2”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). In the same way, you can get a profit from the game. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 16-round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable prize-winning device 31, the game ball enters the probability variation area blade member 31d. Guided through the probability variation area.

  (C) in FIG. 68: When the player continues to make a right strike and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in “9 round symbol 2”, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short. The profit by is hardly obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
(D) in FIG. 68: At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end finish effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Director-in-chief production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a jackpot game when the fireworks rush or coast mode corresponds to “16 round symbols”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 69 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game is being executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, seven effect symbols) is displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, a character “special bonus” is displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character performing a peace sign across a horse is displayed around the screen.

[7 rounds]
69 (B): In the case of winning with a 16-round symbol, a firework rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. If this challenge production is successful, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state of high probability reduction. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th to 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but since the opening time is set long (29 seconds), so far As with the round, you can get a profit from the game. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is operated in the seventh to ninth rounds when winning the 16-round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is used for the probability variation area. It is guided by the blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region.

  In FIG. 69 (C): When the player continues to make a right strike and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is placed next to the female character that has jumped up. The displayed blessing effect is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set as long (29 seconds) as in the 7th round. Therefore, as with previous rounds, profits can be gained by playing. In addition, when the 16-round symbol is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 is also activated for the 8th and 9th rounds. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball is surely changed. It is guided by the region blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region. However, the probability variation area only needs to pass the game ball even once during the big hit game, and if the game ball has already passed the probability variation area in the seventh round, the subsequent passage is not particularly meaningful.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 69 (D): After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when the final 16 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (7 effect symbol) as the above-mentioned “left eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 69 (E): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Direction during small hits]
FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects produced when a small hit is hit during the super fireworks rush.

  In FIG. 70, (A): The variable display effect is executed in the “super fireworks rush” state. In addition, the first effect symbol is displayed with a small variation at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol is displayed with a large variation at the center of the screen. Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a variable manner in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  During the change of the super fireworks rush, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 70: It is assumed that the variation of the second special symbol this time corresponds to a small hit. In this case, in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the special effect symbol in which the animal character is displayed large is stopped and displayed (“1” − “special effect symbol” − “7”). As a result, it can be transmitted to the player that “it was a small hit”. In addition, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, purple display color) corresponding to “small hit”.

  In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol is a variation at the time of a small hit, the variation time measurement pause function is activated, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is substantially synchronized with the stop display of the second special symbol. The measurement is paused and the variable display effect is continued for the first effect symbol. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a mode (for example, a cross mark, etc.) corresponding to the suspension of measurement of the variation time. Note that the fourth symbol Z1 may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the temporary suspension of measurement of the variation time as described above, or normal display during variation may be continued.

  During the stop display of the super fireworks rush, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

(C) in FIG. 70: When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, the small hit game is started.
During the small hit game, a small hit effect (pig chance opportunity) is executed. In the example shown in the figure, an animal character appears from the lower position of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “Pig chance” is executed.

  In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can play a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be earned.

  In FIG. 71, (D): The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continued, and the small hit game is continued. In addition, for the 4th symbol Z2, the display of the mode corresponding to “small hit” (for example, purple display color) is continued, and for the 4th symbol Z1, the mode corresponding to the suspension of the measurement of the variation time is continued. Display continues.

  In FIG. 71, (E): When the small hit game ends, the variable display effect is executed in the “super fireworks rush” state. In addition, the first effect symbol is displayed with a small variation at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol is displayed with a large variation at the center of the screen. Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a variable manner in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variation of the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 becomes a new variation, but the variation of the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 starts the variation after the suspension of the measurement of the variation time is released (variation resumption). )

  During the change of the super fireworks rush, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

  In FIG. 71 (F): The second effect symbol in the center of the screen is stopped and displayed due to the end of the change of the second special symbol (at the time of non-winning) (“3”-“6”-“9 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the first special symbol is not finished, and the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 at the upper left of the screen are also variably displayed.

[Example of operation of the first variable prize-winning device and the second variable prize-winning device in the normal fireworks rush]
FIG. 72 is a continuous diagram showing an operation example of the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device in the normal fireworks rush. Hereinafter, an operation example will be described in order.

  72 (A): Since the first variable prize-winning device 30 and the second variable prize-winning device 31 do not operate during the fluctuation of the normal fireworks rush, the game ball is placed in the first variable prize-winning device 30 and the second variable prize-winning device 31 Do not enter.

  In FIG. 72 (B): The first effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed because the change of the first special symbol this time (at the time of non-winning) has ended ("3"-"3"- “7”). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the second special symbol is not completed, and the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the upper left of the screen are also displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 72 (C): Then, the next variation of the first special symbol is started. In this way, in the normal fireworks rush, the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, but since the small bonus is not set in the first special symbol, it is possible to increase the number of balls due to the small bonus game. It is difficult.

[Example of Super Coast Mode production]
FIG. 73 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the production in the super coast mode. In Super Coast mode, the game ball will change the probable area after the jackpot game when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1a” or during the jackpot game that corresponds to “9 round symbol 2a” or “16 round symbol a”. This mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of not passing. The super coast mode is the “first low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 73, (A): For example, if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1a”, it shifts to the super coast mode after the big hit game is over. In the illustrated example, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are variably displayed in the “super coast mode”.

In the super coast mode, the first effect symbol is variably displayed in a reduced state at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol larger than the first effect symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen.
The reason why the first effect symbol is displayed smaller and the second effect symbol is displayed larger is that, in the super coast mode, the variation in the second special symbol, not the first special symbol, is frequently performed.

  The background image of the super coast mode is a background image in which “animal character” is displayed in addition to images of “sand beach”, “sea”, “mountain”, etc., to show that it is an advantageous coast mode. ing. Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are variably displayed in the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  FIG. 73 (B): The second effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed because the change of the second special symbol (during non-winning) has ended (“1”-“1”- “5”). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the first special symbol is not finished, and the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 at the upper left of the screen are also variably displayed.

  (C) in FIG. 73: Then, the next variation of the second special symbol is started. The super coast mode is ended when the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 without obtaining the winning result. When the super coast mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. When the winning result is obtained in the super coast mode, an effect that the movable body 40f falls and is a big hit is executed, similar to the super fireworks rush.

[Example of normal coast mode production]
FIG. 74 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect in the normal coast mode. In the normal coast mode, after the jackpot game ends when the game corresponds to “9 round symbol 1b” or during the jackpot game corresponding to “9 round symbol 2b” or “16 round symbol b”, the game ball is changed in the probability change area. This mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of not passing. The normal coast mode is the “second low probability time shortening state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 74 (A): For example, if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1b”, it shifts to the normal coast mode after the end of the big hit game. In the example shown in the figure, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are variably displayed in the “normal coast mode”.

In the normal coast mode, the second effect symbol is variably displayed in the reduced state at the upper left of the screen, and the first effect symbol larger than the second effect symbol is variably displayed at the center of the screen.
The reason why the second effect symbol is displayed smaller and the first effect symbol is displayed larger is that in the normal coast mode, the first special symbol is changed frequently instead of the second special symbol.

  The background image of the normal coast mode is only a background image of landscapes such as “sand beach”, “sea”, “mountain”, etc. in order to impress that the coast mode is not so advantageous to the player . For this reason, the “animal character” is not displayed as in the background image of the super coast mode. Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are variably displayed in the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 74 (B): The first effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed due to the end of the change of the first special symbol (at the time of non-winning) this time ("8"-"2"- “2”). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the second special symbol is not completed, and the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the upper left of the screen are also displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 74 (C): Then, the next change in the first special symbol is started. The normal coast mode is ended when the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 without obtaining the winning result. When the normal coast mode ends, the mode changes to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the normal coast mode, the effect that the movable body 40f falls and is a big hit is executed as in the case of the super fireworks rush.

[Direction during small hits]
75 and 76 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effects produced when a small hit is hit during the super coast mode.

  In FIG. 75, (A): The variable display effect is executed in the “super coast mode”. In addition, the first effect symbol is displayed with a small variation at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol is displayed with a large variation at the center of the screen. Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a variable manner in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  During the change of the super coast mode, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 75 (B): It is assumed that the current variation of the second special symbol corresponds to the small hit. In this case, in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the special effect symbol in which the animal character is displayed large is stopped and displayed (“8” − “special effect symbol” − “9”). As a result, it can be transmitted to the player that “it was a small hit”. In addition, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, purple display color) corresponding to “small hit”.

  In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol is a variation at the time of a small hit, the variation time measurement pause function is activated, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is substantially synchronized with the stop display of the second special symbol. The measurement is paused and the variable display effect is continued for the first effect symbol. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a mode (for example, a cross mark, etc.) corresponding to the suspension of measurement of the variation time. Note that the fourth symbol Z1 may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the temporary suspension of measurement of the variation time as described above, or normal display during variation may be continued.

  During the stop display in the super coast mode, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

In FIG. 75 (C): When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, the small hit game is started.
During the small hit game, a small hit effect (pig chance opportunity) is executed. In the example shown in the figure, an animal character appears from the lower position of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “Pig chance” is executed.

  In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can play a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be earned.

  (D) in FIG. 76: The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continued, and the small hit game is continued. In addition, for the 4th symbol Z2, the display of the mode corresponding to “small hit” (for example, purple display color) is continued, and for the 4th symbol Z1, the mode corresponding to the suspension of the measurement of the variation time is continued. Display continues.

  In FIG. 76, (E): When the small hit game is completed, the variable display effect is executed in the “super coast mode”. In addition, the first effect symbol is displayed with a small variation at the upper left of the screen, and the second effect symbol is displayed with a large variation at the center of the screen. Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a variable manner in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variation of the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 becomes a new variation, but the variation of the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 starts the variation after the suspension of the measurement of the variation time is released (variation resumption). )

  During the change of the super coast mode, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate, so that the game ball does not enter the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31.

  In FIG. 76 (F): The second effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed due to the end of the change of the second special symbol (at the time of non-winning) ("3"-"6"-"9"). "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the first special symbol is not finished, and the first effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 at the upper left of the screen are also variably displayed.

[Operation example of the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device in the normal coast mode]
FIG. 77 is a continuous diagram showing an operation example of the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device in the normal coast mode. Hereinafter, an operation example will be described in order.

  In FIG. 77 (A): Since the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate during the change of the normal coast mode, the game balls are placed in the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Do not enter.

  In FIG. 77 (B): The first effect symbol at the center of the screen is stopped and displayed due to the end of the change of the first special symbol (at the time of non-winning) this time ("2"-"2"- “9”). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). However, the variation of the second special symbol is not completed, and the second effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the upper left of the screen are also displayed in a variable manner.

  (C) in FIG. 77: Then, the next change in the first special symbol is started. In this normal coast mode, the 1st special symbol will be variably displayed, but there is no small hit set for the 1st special symbol, so it is difficult to increase the number of balls by small hit game. is there.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effects, reach effects, pre-reach notice effects, stored number display effects, big-time effects, small hit effects, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passing command, a prize ball content command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the production. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 78).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operating. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of the process (step S508) and the effect symbol temporary suspension process (step S509). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S509). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is variable when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 14 or step S5900 in FIG. 15) or the small winning time variable. When a winning device management process (step S6000 in FIG. 14 or step S6900 in FIG. 15) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, Steps S502 to S506 and Step S509 are not executed.

  Further, the effect symbol suspension process (step S509) is selected as a jump destination when the main control CPU 72 selects the variation time measurement suspension process (step S7000 in FIG. 14). In this case, steps S502 to S508 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 sets a condition for starting a variable display effect using the first effect symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second effect symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Perform the preparation work. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means).

  Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small hit game or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a 9-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 9-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

  Step S509: In the effect symbol temporary suspension process, the effect control CPU 126 executes control to continue the fluctuation without stopping the first effect symbol during the small hit game with the second special symbol. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern to be displayed in a mode (for example, a cross mark or the like) corresponding to the suspension of measurement of the variation time for the fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol. To do.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 78) and the lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 78). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is hit, a process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the special effect symbol for the medium effect symbol is executed.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. The details of the mode effect management process will be described later.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 80), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number corresponding to the super fireworks rush or the normal fireworks rush based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number corresponding to the super coast mode or the normal coast mode based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit in the coast mode.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG.

  Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 81).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number corresponding to the super fireworks rush or the normal fireworks rush based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of loss shown in FIG.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number corresponding to the super coast mode or the normal coast mode based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 73 or 74 is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of loss shown in FIG.

  Then, when any of the above processes is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 81).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S720: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability non-time shortened state. The internal state can be confirmed by, for example, a state designation command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability non-time reduced state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S728. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is the low probability non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S722.

  Step S722: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S724. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S726.

  Step S724: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol. Confirmation as to which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds can be realized by storing information on the winning symbol in the RAM 130 at the time of the previous winning. The advantageous symbols are winning symbols that shift to “Super Fireworks Rush” or “Super Coast Mode” after the end of the jackpot game. “9 Round Symbol 1a”, “9 Round Symbol 2a”, “16 Round Symbol a Is applicable.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S730. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S732.

  Step S726: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S734. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the previous winning symbol corresponds to the advantageous symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S736.

  Step S728: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the low probability non-time reduced state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a “normal mode” background image ((B) in FIG. 59).

  Step S730: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the super fireworks rush. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image of “Super Fireworks Rush” ((A) in FIG. 65).

  Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for normal fireworks rush. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image of “normal fireworks rush” ((A) in FIG. 66).

  Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the super coast mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image ((A) in FIG. 73) of the “super coast mode”.

  Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the normal coast mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image ((A) in FIG. 74) of “normal coast mode”.

  And after finishing the process of step S728-step S736, effect control CPU126 returns to effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 81).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 1”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. Also, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 2”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character or a normal bonus effect is executed. Further, in the case of winning with “16 round symbols”, processing for selecting a special bonus effect is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146. Further, in this variable winning device operating process, when a probability change area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 63) is selected. On the other hand, when the process is executed and the probability variation area passing command is not received during the big hit game, the process of selecting the effect (the effect shown in (N) in FIG. 64) indicating that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device post-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transfer destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes the coast mode rush effect or the fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not the winning symbol or the probability variation area has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, a process for selecting an effect (effect shown in (K) in FIG. 63) indicating that the fireworks rush is entered is executed. When the probability variation area passing command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in FIG. 62 (G), etc.) indicating entering the coast mode is executed.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable prize device pre-operation process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “small hit”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with the stop symbol command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “small hit” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S914 and cannot confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “small hit”. In the case (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S911.

  Step S911: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with the stop symbol command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S915, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S913, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918.

  Step S913: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a non-time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the non-time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916. If the internal state is not the non-time shortened state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S917. .

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit effect selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting a small hit effect (pig chance opportunity) shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71, FIG. 75, FIG.

  Step S915: The effect control CPU 126 executes a defeat effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a teammate character loses by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (E), (F), etc. in FIGS.

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a victory effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a friend character wins by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (H) in FIGS.

  Step S917: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal bonus effect selection process. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special bonus effect selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect for executing a special jackpot effect without executing the battle effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in FIG.

  Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation processing (FIG. 85).

[Processing during variable winning system operation]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable winning device operating process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a V prize related effect. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a probability variation area passing command has been received in a specific round (probability variation round). When it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 63) for transmitting to the player that a V prize has occurred is executed. When it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has not been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in (N) in FIG. 64) that conveys to the player that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a point effect management process. By executing this processing, it is possible to transmit to the player the profit obtained during the big hit game (the profit from the game). For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that teaches the total number of points to be paid out based on the prize ball content command. Specifically, when the production control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the first profit (a command indicating that a game ball has entered the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31). The effect pattern which increases the total number of payout points by 15 points is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 85).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the frequency of the second special symbol is variably displayed in the super fireworks rush (first high probability time shortened state) and the super coast mode (first low probability time shortened state). In the normal fireworks rush (second high probability time shortened state) and the normal coast mode (second low probability time shortened state), the frequency with which the first special symbol is variably displayed is high.
Moreover, in this embodiment, since the gameability which changes a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol in parallel is employ | adopted, even if the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol does not stop, it is the 2nd special symbol in the meantime. The symbol will change and stop repeatedly.

  In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery does not correspond to the small hit, the second special symbol lottery sets the probability of hitting the small hit to 1/3. When you are staying in the Super Fireworks Rush or Super Coast mode, you are more likely to hit the jackpot than when you are staying in the Fireworks Rush or Normal Coast mode.

  As a result, small hit games are rarely executed in the normal fireworks rush or normal coast mode, and small hit games are frequently executed in the super fireworks rush or super coast mode. And the base of Super Coast mode can be improved. For this reason, even in the same time reduction state, the base can be changed between the coast mode and the fireworks rush, and a base divergence can be generated between the two states.

  In addition, in Super Fireworks Rush and Super Coast mode, small hit games are frequently executed, so that you can get the benefit of starting out, and the conventional high probability time reduction state and low probability time reduction state Compared to the above, it is possible to create a high probability time shortening state and a low probability time shortening state which are more advantageous.

  Furthermore, in normal fireworks rush and normal coast mode, little hit games are executed, so this will suppress the base of normal fireworks rush and normal coast mode, but the base of the suppressed amount will be super fireworks rush and super It can be added to the base in the coast mode, and the superiority of the super fireworks rush and the super coast mode can be further improved.

  Furthermore, generally, there is a feeling that the player's expectation is improved if the state shifts to the high probability time shortening state, and that the player feels sorry when the state shifts to the low probability time shortening state. However, in this embodiment, there are still advantageous super fireworks rushes and less advantageous normal fireworks rushes even in the same high probability time shortening state, so there is still no relief even after the transition to the high probability time shortening state. In addition, since there is a super coast mode that is advantageous even in the same low probability time shortening state and a normal coast mode that is not so advantageous, even if the transition to the low probability time shortening state is made, it is not completely unfortunate.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the embodiment described above, an example of a gaming machine having a probability variation area has been described. Machine).

In the above-described embodiment, regarding the special symbol variation time in the “normal mode (corresponding to the normal state in which the time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is deactivated)” and matters relating to the normal symbol game Although not particularly limited, the following limitations can be added.
Here, in the above-described embodiment, since the gameability of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel is adopted, in the “normal mode”, the first special symbol is the second one. It is desirable to have a game configuration that is biased to repeat many stops and fluctuations per unit time rather than fluctuations in special symbols. That is, in the “normal mode”, it is preferable that the second special symbol is not changed as much as possible.

In addition, as a method for suppressing the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the “normal mode”, for example, it can be realized by adopting at least one of the following methods.
(1) The variation time per second of the second special symbol in the “normal mode” is set as a relatively long variation time (for example, about 10 to 30 minutes), and the second special symbol is varied more than the first special symbol. Make it difficult.
(2) By adjusting the configuration of the game area 8a (configuration of obstacles, flow paths, etc.), if left-handed, the right-handed game ball is placed in the upper start winning opening 26b corresponding to the first special symbol. The probability that a game ball will win the middle start winning opening 26a corresponding to the first special symbol is made higher than when winning.
(3) With respect to the right start winning port 28a corresponding to the second special symbol which cannot be won (difficult to win) unless the variable start winning device 28 is operated (opened), the normal symbol variation time in the normal mode is relatively long. (For example, about 10 to 30 minutes) or by setting the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery in the normal mode low (for example, set to about 1 / thousandth to tens of thousands) The operation probability of the device 28 is reduced to a chopstick and the probability that a game ball will win the right start winning opening 28a is lowered.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A lottery execution means for executing a lottery to determine whether or not the first lottery opportunity or the second lottery opportunity occurs during the game relating to the flow of the game ball, and the first lottery opportunity; Alternatively, the first symbol for displaying the lottery result corresponding to the second lottery trigger or the variation time related to the variation display of the second symbol can be determined, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied in parallel. Game control means,
In a gaming machine capable of shifting to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state after the end of a special game that can be executed based on the display of the lottery result,
As the advantageous gaming state, a high probability state corresponding to the special winning at a higher probability than the low probability state corresponding to the special winning at a predetermined probability, and the second lottery opportunity is generated at a predetermined frequency. A time shortening state in which the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity is possible at a higher frequency compared to the time shortening state,
The lottery execution means
When the second lottery opportunity occurs, the probability corresponding to the special winning is set higher than when the first lottery opportunity occurs,
The game control means includes
When the special winning condition is satisfied and the predetermined first transition condition is satisfied, the high probability state and the time shortening state are set after the special game ends, and the variation time of the first symbol is It is possible to shift to the first high probability time shortening state set longer than the variation time of the second symbol,
When the special winning condition is satisfied and a predetermined second transition condition is satisfied, the high probability state and the time shortening state are set after the special game ends, and the variation time of the first symbol is It is possible to shift to the second high probability time shortening state set shorter than the variation time of the second symbol,
When the special winning condition is satisfied and a predetermined third transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state and the time shortening state are set after the special game ends, and the variation time of the first symbol is set to It is possible to shift to the first low probability time shortening state set longer than the variation time of the second symbol,
When the special winning condition is satisfied and the predetermined fourth transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state and the time shortening state are set after the special game ends, and the variation time of the first symbol is A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift to a second low probability time shortening state set shorter than the variation time of the second symbol.